JP2015144686A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement that a player has.SOLUTION: When winning is determined, a rotating member 650 is rotated and displaced, and a specific winning hole 65a is shifted from a closed state directed to a first closing part 671 to an open state directed to a first opening part 681 or a second opening part 682. Thus, a player who tries to allow game balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a is allowed to change a way of shooting game balls.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a variable prize device having a horizontally long specific prize opening. Normally, this variable prize-winning device is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win because the specific prize opening is covered with an opening / closing plate, and the jackpot that gives the player a game value advantageous to the player is lost. When this occurs, the opening / closing plate tilts downward on the front surface, and operates to alternately repeat an open state and a normal closed state in which a game ball is likely to win a specific winning opening.

JP 2011-078836 A

  However, since there are many gaming machines that adopt the same structure as the above-described conventional variable prize device, a player who has seen a gaming machine that employs the above-described conventional variable prize device played a game with the gaming machine. Even if there is no such situation, the operation mode of the variable winning device can be easily predicted. As a result, there is a problem in that the game enjoyed by the player is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the gaming property that a player enjoys.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is configured to determine whether or not to make a determination based on establishment of the determination condition, and to allow the player to enter the ball based on the determination that the determination means The entrance opening set in the state and the first position where the game ball can enter when the entrance is open or the second position where the game ball is less likely to enter than the first position. Displacement means for displacing the entry ball mouth, and position determining means for deciding whether the ball entrance is to be displaced to the first position or the second position when the determination means determines that the entry is successful. And a displacement control means for displacing the entrance into a position determined by the position determining means.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the displacement means rotates the entrance.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the displacement control means restricts entry of the game ball into the entrance in a normal state that is not set to the entrance state. The entrance is displaced to the restricted position.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the opening state is established based on the determination by the determination means, the entrance is displaced to either the first position or the second position by the displacement means. Can be made. Thereby, it is possible to direct the player to change the way of launching the game ball in accordance with the displacement of the entrance, so that the game enjoyed by the player can be improved.

  In addition, when the entrance is displaced to the second position, the game ball is less likely to enter the entrance than when the entrance is displaced to the first position. Which position of the second position is displaced is determined by the position determining means. Accordingly, since the ease of entering the entrance can be changed by the displacement of the entrance, there is an effect that the game enjoyed by the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the entrance is displaced to the first position or the second position by rotating the entrance by the displacing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration for displacing the entrance is simplified.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in the normal state, the entry of the gaming ball to the entrance is restricted. There is an effect that the entrance to the entrance can be restricted or allowed through the displacement.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a side view of the variable winning device as viewed from the IVb direction of FIG. 4 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 4 (b). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the IVc-IVc line, (d) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the IVd-IVd line of Fig.4 (a). It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. (A) is the partial expansion front view of the game board in a closed state, (b) is the partial expansion front view of the game board in a 1st open state. (A) is the partial expansion front view of the game board in the 2nd open state, (b) is the game which represented typically the displacement mode of the variable prize-winning device at the time of shifting from the 2nd open state to the closed state. It is a partial enlarged front view of a board. (A) is a partially enlarged back view of the game board, (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board along the line VIIIb-VIIIb of FIG. 8 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in a VIIIc-VIIIc line of). It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM in a main controller, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM in a main controller. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol jackpot random number table in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a jackpot type selection table in the main controller, (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal hit random number table in a main controller. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM in a voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the model which showed typically a part of content of RAM in a voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot return process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory act | action process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. (A) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the variable prize apparatus seen from XXXIb direction of Fig.31 (a), (c) is It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the XXXIc-XXXXIc line of FIG.31 (b), (d) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the xxxId-XXXId line of FIG.31 (a). It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device in the third embodiment, (b) is a back view of the variable winning device, and (c) is viewed from the XXXIVc direction of FIG. 34 (a). It is a side view of a variable winning device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. It is an exploded view of the variable prize apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body along the line XXXVIIIb-XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38 (a), and (c) is a front view of the rotating lever. . (A) is a front view of a rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed from the XXXIXc-XXXIXc direction in FIG. 39 (a). is there. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a back view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device as viewed from the XXXc direction of FIG. 40 (a). It is. It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. It is a partial expanded front view of the game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM in the main controller of 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the jackpot classification selection table in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot setting process 2 performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the jackpot classification selection table in the main controller of 7th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 18, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112 a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks, and when a predetermined condition (see S1410 in FIG. 19) is established, it is notified that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first start port 64, the second start port 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). It is done. The general winning port 63, the first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole 63 or the like is disposed and a ball that has been launched. Is the area where the water flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 19) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has entered the first start port 64 or the second start port 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball enters the first start port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball enters the second start port 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not it is fluctuating by a lighting state, and a stop pattern is definitely Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a ball enters the first start port 64 and the second start port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R probability variation jackpot and 16R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, “16R probable jackpot” is a probable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 16 rounds, and “16R normal jackpot” is a jackpot of 16 rounds. Later, a transition is made to the low probability state, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), this is a jackpot that results in a short-time state.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball easily enters the second starting port 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the second start port 640 is increased. A game state in which a ball is easy to enter. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is changed, and a longer time than in normal time is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an opened state (open state), a ball enters the second start port 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second start port 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in a short period of time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second start port 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time is not counted. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, the third symbol is synchronized with the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 (start winning prize). The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 19), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on for a predetermined time. Is. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. If the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second start port 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second start port 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the probability of hitting is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second start port 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of a ball flowing down the game area to pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first start port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first starting port 64, a first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first starting port switch. A jackpot lottery is performed at 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second starting port 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view. When a ball enters the second start port 640, a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the second start port switch. A jackpot lottery is performed at 110 (see FIG. 19), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first start port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second start port 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first start port 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second start port 640, for example, the first start. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the mouth 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second start port 640 may be five.

  The second starting port 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball is difficult to enter the second starting port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( In an enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second start port 640 during the probability change and the time reduction compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first start port 64 and the case where the ball enters the second start port 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, the probability of a 16R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is won is greater when the ball enters the second starting port 640 than when the ball enters the first starting port 64. Is also set high. On the other hand, the first start port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second start port 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second start port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second start port 640, so the first start port 64 without the electric accessory is not provided. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball passes through the left (so-called “left-handed”), and by entering the first starting port 64, many chances of winning a lottery are obtained, It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during a short time, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second start port 640 is likely to be in an open state and easily enters the second start port 640, and therefore, toward the second start port 640. The player who fires the ball so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”) and enters the second start port 640 to aim for a 15R probability variation big hit, It is advantageous for the person.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Below the first starting port 64, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning port 65a is disposed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to entering the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop pattern The LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A is turned on so that the jackpot is displayed and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  Each of the specific winning ports 65a is closed when the predetermined condition described above is satisfied, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or difficult to win. Although details will be described later, in the closed state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 19) is placed at a position where the specific winning opening 65a is closed by a nail (set to an opening width that restricts the entry of a game ball). It is driven to temporarily form an open state where the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the jackpot are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is opened. You may make it form as a special game state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the general winning port 63, the starting ports 64 and 640, and the specific winning port 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 19). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the variable winning device 65 viewed from the IVb direction in FIG. 4A. These are sectional drawings of the variable prize-winning apparatus 65 in the IVc-IVc line | wire of FIG.4 (b), FIG.4 (d) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus 65 in the IVd-IVd line | wire of Fig.4 (a). . In addition, in FIG.4 (b) and FIG.4 (d), the drive motor M is typically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 has a rotating member 650 that is rotatably held with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 5A) and a driving force for rotating the rotating member 650. A drive motor M is mainly provided.

  The rotating member 650 includes a disc-shaped disc portion 651 and a ball entry portion 652 that is fixed to the front side of the disc portion 651 (the lower side in FIG. 4B).

  The disc portion 651 has a rotating shaft 651a erected on the center portion on the back surface side (upper side in FIG. 4B) and an opening area through which at least a game ball can flow into a position offset from the rotating shaft 651a. And an inflow port 651b formed as a notch.

  In the present embodiment, the inflow port 651b is notched from the outer edge portion of the disc portion 651 toward the center, but by cutting out the inflow port 651b while leaving the outer edge portion of the disc portion 651 remaining. It may be formed.

  The incoming ball portion 652 includes an opposing wall 653 disposed to face the front side of the disc portion 651 and a connecting wall 654 that connects the opposing wall 653 to the disc portion 651.

  The facing wall 653 is disposed at a position corresponding to the inflow port 651b in the front view of the rotating member 650, and the distance between the facing wall 653 and the disc portion 651 is set larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The connection wall 654 is a part for restricting the inflow of game balls to the inflow port 651b, and extends in a substantially U shape in front view along the periphery of the inflow port 651b. Both ends of the connecting wall 654 are located at the outer edge portion of the disc portion 651, and an interval of approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball is provided between the both ends of the connecting wall 654.

  The entrance area 652 is configured such that an opening area formed between both end portions of the connecting wall 654 is a specific winning opening 65a into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that has entered from the specific winning opening 65a is: It is accommodated in an accommodating portion 655 that is an internal space surrounded by the opposing wall 653 and the connecting wall 654.

  The first connecting wall 654a, which is a portion of the connecting wall 654 that is disposed at a position facing the specific winning port 65a, has an opposing interval with the specific winning port 65a as the inner peripheral surface approaches the inflow port 651b. Inclined to increase. Thereby, the game ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 655 and landing on the inner peripheral surface of the first connecting wall 654a can be guided to the inflow port 651b side by the inclination of the inner peripheral surface of the first connecting wall 654a.

  Further, the second connection wall 654b connected to one side of the first connection wall 654a (the right side in FIG. 4B) of the connection walls 654 has a connection wall 654 as its inner peripheral surface approaches the inlet 651b. Among them, the first connection wall 654a is inclined so that the facing distance from the inner peripheral surface of the third connection wall 654c provided on the other side (left side in FIG. 4B) is increased. Thereby, the game ball landed on the inner peripheral surface of the second connecting wall 654b accommodated in the accommodating portion 655 can be guided to the inflow port 651b side by the inclination of the inner peripheral surface of the second connecting wall 654b.

  In this way, the game ball that has entered the housing portion 655 from the specific winning opening 65a can be taken into the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from becoming clogged inside the accommodating portion 655.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 651b is connected to the inner peripheral surfaces of the first connection wall 654a and the second connection wall 654b so as to be flush with each other. Thereby, the game ball which landed on each inner peripheral surface of the 1st connection wall 654a and the 2nd connection wall 654b can be smoothly taken in into the inflow port 651b.

  Note that the inner peripheral surfaces of the first connecting wall 654a and the second connecting wall 654b do not need to be flush with the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 651b, but the first connecting wall 654a and the second connecting wall. If it is possible to take in a game ball from each inner peripheral surface of 654b to the inflow port 651b (if an opening area is secured to allow the game ball to be taken in from the inflow port 651b to the back side), the inflow port 651b. It may overhang from the inner peripheral surface to the inlet 651b side. Thereby, it can avoid that the game ball which landed on each internal peripheral surface of the 1st connection wall 654a and the 2nd connection wall 654b is caught in the disc part 651, and the inflow to the inflow port 651b is inhibited.

  The driving motor M is a stepping motor that applies a rotational driving force to the rotating member 650, and the driving shaft Ma is coupled to the rotating shaft 651 a of the disc portion 651. A rotational position detection sensor S composed of a rotary encoder is mounted on the drive shaft Ma, and the rotational position of the rotational member 650 relative to the game board 13 is detected by the rotational position detection sensor S.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation position detection sensor S formed of a rotary encoder is configured to detect the angle of the rotation member 650. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation member 650 is at the origin position (FIG. 5B). In this case, a part of the rotating member 650 (for example, a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 650 to the back side and the protruding piece) is detected by a photosensor, You may comprise so that only a position may be detected. In such a case, in the initial setting process when the power is turned on, the stepping motor is rotated in a predetermined rotation direction (for example, clockwise), and the location where the photosensor is turned on is set as the origin position. Then, the step counter may be set to 0, and the position of the rotating member 650 may be determined based on the value of the step counter.

  Next, the arrangement relationship between the game board 13 and the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13, FIG. 5A shows the game board 13 before the variable prize device 65 is installed, and FIG. 5B shows the variable prize. The game board 13 with the device 65 installed is shown. 5A, illustration of the first passage 691 and the second passage 692 (see FIG. 8A) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 is omitted to simplify the drawing. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), a hole 13a having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed in the game board 13, and the outer diameter of the hole 13a is outside the disk portion 651 (see FIG. 5 (b)). The dimensions are set slightly larger than the diameter.

  Around the hole portion 13a, a first closing portion 671 formed on the left side of the hole portion 13a, a second closing portion 672 formed on the upper right side of the hole portion 13a, and a lower right side of the hole portion 13a are formed. A third closing portion 673, a first opening portion 681 formed between the first closing portion 671 and the second closing portion 672 and above the hole portion 13a, and a second closing portion 672 and a third closing portion. A second opening portion 682 formed between the portions 673 and to the right of the hole portion 13a, and a drainage ball formed between the first closing portion 671 and the third closing portion 673 and below the hole portion 13a. Part 683 is formed.

  The 1st closing part 671, the 2nd closing part 672, and the 3rd closing part 673 are parts which regulate the inflow of a game ball to inflow mouth 651b (refer to Drawing 5 (b)), the 1st opening part 681, the 1st The 2 opening part 682 and the ball discharging part 683 are parts configured as flow paths through which game balls can pass.

  The first closing portion 671, the second closing portion 672, and the third closing portion 673 are each configured by a plurality of nails planted in the game board 13 so as to surround the hole portion 13a, and the plurality of nails are adjacent to each other. The distance between the nails is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the inflow to the inflow port 651b is restricted for the game ball which collides with the 1st closing part 671, the 2nd closing part 672, or the 3rd closing part 673.

  The first opening portion 681 includes a nail N1 disposed at a position closest to the second closing portion 672 among a plurality of nails constituting the first closing portion 671 and a nail constituting the second closing portion 672. It is a flow path formed between the nail N2 disposed at a position close to the first closing part 671.

  The first opening portion 681 has a channel width (interval between the nail N1 and the nail N2) set to a dimension slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The second opening portion 682 includes a nail N3 disposed at a position close to the third closing portion 673 among the two nails constituting the second closing portion 672, and a plurality of nails constituting the third closing portion 673. Among these, the flow path is formed between the nail N4 disposed at a position closest to the second closing portion 672.

  The second opening portion 682 has a flow path width (that is, a distance between the nail N3 and the nail N4) set to a size larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The channel width of the second opening portion 682 is set to a dimension that the channel width is larger than that of the first opening portion 681, and the channel width of the first opening portion 681 is larger than the opening width of the specific winning opening 65a. Small dimensions are set.

  A plurality of nails are arranged in a row on the game board 13 from the nail N4 toward the upper right, and the plurality of nails function as a guide path for guiding the game ball to the second opening portion 682.

  The ball discharging portion 683 includes a nail N5 disposed at a position closest to the third closing portion 673 among the plurality of nails constituting the first closing portion 671, and a plurality of nails constituting the third closing portion 673. It is a flow path formed between the nail N6 disposed at a position closest to the first closing portion 671.

  Since the out port 66 (see FIG. 2) is formed below the variable winning device 65, the game ball that has passed through the ball discharging portion 683 can be smoothly guided to the out port 66.

  The drainage portion 683 has a flow path width (a distance between the nail N5 and the nail N6) set to a dimension (for example, three times the diameter of the game ball) that is at least larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In addition, it is preferable that the flow path width of the draining part 683 is set to be larger than the flow path widths of the first open part 681 and the second open part 682. As a result, even when a large number of game balls flow from both the first opening part 681 and the second opening part 682 in a short time, the game ball can smoothly flow down from the ball discharging part 683 to the downstream side. .

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the variable prize apparatus 65 has the disc portion 651 accommodated in the hole 13a in a state where it is mounted on the game board 13, and the front side of the disc portion 651 (FIG. 5). (B) The front side of the paper surface is arranged so as to be flush with the front side of the game board 13. Thereby, the disc part 651 can be comprised as a part of game board 13, and the space for a game ball to flow down can be formed in the front side of the disc part 651. FIG.

  Further, the hole portion 13a is closed by the disc portion 651 in most regions except for the position where the inflow port 651b is disposed. Accordingly, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can be flowed from the inflow port 651b (hole 13a) to the back side of the game board 13, but the gaming ball that has flowed away from the specific winning opening 65a. Flows down from the ball discharging portion 683 as it is.

  When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving shaft Ma (see FIG. 4D) of the driving motor M to the rotating shaft 651a (see FIG. 4D), the rotating member 650 rotates, and accordingly, the entrance portion 652 is rotationally displaced. At this time, the specific winning opening 65a is displaced along a circumference around the rotation shaft 651a in a state of being directed radially outward of the rotation member 650.

  In addition, as a displacement mode of the rotation member 650, the closed state (normal state) in which the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, and the first in which the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a are possible. There are an open state and a second open state. Hereinafter, the displacement mode of the rotating member 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

  FIG. 6A is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the closed state, and FIG. 6B is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the first open state. FIG. 7A is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the second open state, and FIG. 7B schematically shows the displacement mode of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the second open state to the closed state. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 schematically represented. 6 and 7, in order to simplify the drawings and make the explanation easy to understand, the ball entering portion 652 is viewed in cross section, and the flowing-down mode of the game ball passing through the first opening portion 681 or the second opening portion 682 is shown. This is schematically shown.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in the case of shifting from the open state (first open state or second open state) to the closed state, the drive motor M is controlled so that the specific winning opening 65a is the first closed portion 671. The rotating member 650 is rotated until it reaches a position opposite to.

  In this closed state, the rotating member 650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 65a facing the first closing portion 671. The specific winning opening 65a is directed to the first closing part 671, and a connecting wall 654 configured as a side wall surface of the ball entering part 652 is provided between the first opening part 681, the second opening part 682, and the inflow port 651b. Arranged.

  The shortest distance between the tip of the second connecting wall 654b and the nail constituting the first closing portion 671, and the shortest distance between the tip of the third connecting wall 654c and the nail constituting the first closing portion 671 The dimension is set smaller than the outer diameter of the sphere. That is, the passage of the game ball between the second connection wall 654b and the first closing part 671 and between the third connection wall 654c and the first closing part 671 is restricted.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game balls that have passed through the first opening portion 681 and the second opening portion 682 from flowing into the inflow port 651b.

  In the ball entry portion 652, the tip end portion of the second connection wall 654b is located in the vicinity of the nail N1, and the distance between the second connection wall 654b and the second closing portion 672 (interval with the nail N2) is greater than the outer diameter of the game ball. Is still at a position where the dimensions are large. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 can smoothly flow down toward the ball discharging portion 683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 can be prevented from being clogged between the second connecting wall 654b and the second closing portion 672, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the first opening portion 681. Can be prevented.

  The incoming ball portion 652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the second connecting wall 654b and the third closing portion 673 is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 can smoothly flow down toward the ball discharge portion 683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 654 and the third closing portion 673, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 682. Can be prevented.

  Since the ball entry portion 652 is disposed at a position offset from the center of rotation of the disc portion 651, in the closed state, the connection wall 654, the second closing portion 672, and the third closing portion 673 The interval, that is, the flow path for allowing the game ball that has passed through the first opening part 681 or the second opening part 682 to flow down to the ball discharging part 683 can be widened.

  Furthermore, since the drainage portion 683 has a channel width that is set to be larger than the channel widths of the first opening portion 681 and the second opening portion 682, the first opening portion 681 and the second opening portion 682 Even when a large number of game balls pass at the same time, the game balls can be smoothly flowed down from the ball discharge portion 683 to the downstream side.

  In the closed state, the incoming ball portion 652 moves the outer wall surface of the second connection wall 654b of the connection wall 654 facing the first opening portion 681 from the distal end portion of the second connection wall 654b to the first connection wall 654a side. Still in a state of being inclined downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 from rolling to the tip side of the second connection wall 654b. That is, the game ball can be prevented from staying between the second connecting wall 654b and the first closing portion 671 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 683.

  Thus, in the closed state, entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, and any game ball passing through the first opening portion 681 and the second opening portion 682 enters the specific winning opening 65a. Without flowing down from the ball discharging portion 683.

  Next, a 1st open state is demonstrated with reference to FIG.6 (b). As shown in FIG. 6 (b), when shifting from the closed state to the first open state, the drive motor M is controlled, and the rotating member until the specific winning opening 65a reaches the position directed to the first open portion 681. 650 is rotated.

  In the first open state, the rotating member 650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 65a facing the first open portion 681. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 can enter the specific winning opening 65a and flow into the inflow port 651b.

  Further, the tip end portion of the third connecting wall 654c is located on the other circumferential side of the rotating member 650 (the counterclockwise direction side in FIG. 6B, the left side in FIG. 6B) with respect to the nail N1, and the second connecting wall The ball-entry portion 652 is stationary with the tip portion of 654b positioned on one side of the rotating member 650 in the circumferential direction (FIG. 6 (b) clockwise side, right side of FIG. 6 (b)) relative to the nail N2. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  A connecting wall 654 configured as a side wall surface of the incoming ball portion 652 is disposed between the second opening portion 682 and the inflow port 651b. Further, the shortest distance between the tip portion of the second connection wall 654b and the second closing portion 672 (the distance between the nails N2 and N3) and the shortest distance between the tip portion of the third connection wall 654c and the first closing portion 671. (Spacing with nail N1) is set to a size smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the passage of the game ball between the second connection wall 654b and the second closing portion 672 and between the third connection wall 654c and the first closing portion 671 is restricted.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 from flowing into the inflow port 651b.

  In addition, the ball entry portion 652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the connecting wall 654 and the third closing portion 673 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 can smoothly flow down toward the ball discharge portion 683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 654 and the third closing portion 673, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 682. Can be prevented.

  Since the ball entry portion 652 is disposed at a position offset from the rotation center of the disc portion 651, the corresponding distance between the connection wall 654 and the third closure portion 673 in the first open state, that is, The flow path for allowing the game ball that has passed through the second opening part 682 to flow down to the ball discharging part 683 can be widened.

  Further, the incoming ball portion 652 is inclined so that the outer wall surface of the second connection wall 654b facing the second opening portion 682 of the connection wall 654 descends from the tip end portion of the second connection wall 654b toward the first connection wall 654a. Stand still in Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 can smoothly flow down toward the ball discharge portion 683.

  In this way, in the first open state, the game ball passing through the first open portion 681 can enter the specific winning opening 65a, while the game ball passing through the second open portion 682 is removed from the ball discharge portion 683. It is possible to smoothly flow down to the downstream side.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is normally closed, but when the “big hit A” or “big hit C” described later is reached, the rotating member 650 is unidirectional (see FIG. 6A). ) Start clockwise rotation), and shift to the first open state. Thereafter, when the closing condition described later is satisfied after the transition to the first opened state is completed, the rotating member 650 starts to rotate in the other direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 6B), and the first opened state. Transition from state to closed state. The transition from the closed state to the first open state and the transition from the first open state to the closed state are repeated (16 times in the present embodiment).

  Here, when the rotating member 650 is rotated in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 6A) when shifting from the closed state to the first open state, the specific winning a prize mouth is rotated in the process of rotating the rotating member 650. 65 a is temporarily directed to the second opening 682. When the game ball passes through the second opening portion 682 at this timing, the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a.

  Similarly, when the rotating member 650 is rotated in one direction (the clockwise direction shown in FIG. 6B) when shifting from the first open state to the closed state, a specific prize is awarded in the process of rotating the rotating member 650. The mouth 65a is temporarily directed to the second opening 682. When the game ball passes through the second opening portion 682 at this timing, the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 650 is rotated in one direction when shifting from the closed state to the first opened state, and the rotating member is moved when shifting from the first opened state to the closed state. By rotating 650 in the other direction, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 from entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  Moreover, the 1st open part 681 is adjacent to the one direction side (FIG. 6 (a) clockwise direction, FIG. 6 (a) right side) of the 1st closing part 671. Therefore, when shifting from the closed state to the first open state, the specific winning opening 65a is displaced in one direction so that the shift from the closed state to the first open state can be performed quickly.

  Next, the second open state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the case of transition from the closed state to the second open state, the drive motor M is controlled until the specific winning opening 65a reaches the position directed to the second open portion 682 until the rotary member 650 is reached. Rotate.

  In the second open state, the rotating member 650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 65a facing the second open portion 682. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 can enter the specific winning opening 65a and flow into the inflow port 651b.

  Further, the tip end portion of the third connecting wall 654c is positioned near the nail N3, and the tip end portion of the second connecting wall 654b is one side in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 650 with respect to the nail N4 (FIG. 7 (a) clockwise side, The ball entry portion 652 stops in a state of being positioned in the lower side of FIG. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the second open state, the ball entering portion 652 stops with the inner peripheral surface of the second connection wall 654b inclined downward from the tip portion of the second connection wall 654b toward the first connection wall 654a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game ball that has once entered the specific winning opening 65a from jumping out of the specific winning opening 65a.

  The second opening portion 682 has a channel width that is larger than that of the first opening portion 681. Therefore, in the second open state, it is possible to make the game ball enter the specific winning opening 65a more efficiently than in the first open state (see FIG. 6B).

  In addition, since the first opening portion 681 is set to have a flow path width smaller than the opening width of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to easily adjust the ease of entering the specific winning opening 65a. it can. That is, the structure of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified as compared with the case where the opening width of the specific winning opening 65a is variably configured.

  In the second open state, a connecting wall 654 configured as a side wall surface of the ball entry portion 652 is disposed between the first open portion 681 and the inflow port 651b. Furthermore, the shortest distance (distance between the nail N3) between the distal end portion of the third connection wall 654c and the second closing portion 672 and the shortest distance (nail between the distal end portion of the second connection wall 654b and the third closing portion 673). N4) is set to a size smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the passage of the game ball between the third connection wall 654c and the second closing part 672 and between the second connection wall 654b and the third closing part 673 is restricted.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 from flowing into the inflow port 651b.

  The ball entry portion 652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the connecting wall 654 and the first closing portion 671 is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 can smoothly flow down toward the ball discharging portion 683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 654 and the first closing portion 671, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the first opening portion 681. Can be prevented.

  Since the ball entry portion 652 is disposed at a position offset from the rotation center of the disc portion 651, in the second open state, the distance between the connecting wall 654 and the first closing portion 671, that is, The flow path for allowing the game ball that has passed through the first opening part 681 to flow down to the ball discharging part 683 can be widened.

  In the second open state, the incoming ball portion 652 has an outer wall surface of the third connection wall 654c facing the first opening portion 681 in the connection wall 654, from the distal end portion of the third connection wall 654c to the first connection wall 654a side. Still in a state of being inclined downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 from rolling to the distal end side of the third connection wall 654c. That is, it is possible to avoid the game ball from staying between the third connection wall 654c and the second closing portion 672 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 683.

  In this way, in the second open state, the game ball passing through the second open portion 682 can enter the specific winning opening 65a, while the game ball passing through the first open portion 681 is removed from the ball discharge portion 683. It is possible to smoothly flow down to the downstream side.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is normally closed, but when the “big hit B” or “big hit D” described later is reached, the rotating member 650 is moved in the other direction (FIG. 7A). ) Starts rotation in the counterclockwise direction) and shifts to the second open state. Thereafter, when the closing condition described later is satisfied after the transition to the second open state is completed, the rotating member 650 starts to rotate in one direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 7A), and the second open state. To the closed state. The transition from the closed state to the second open state and the transition from the second open state to the closed state are repeated (in the present embodiment, 16 times).

  Here, when the rotating member 650 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 7A, the clockwise direction) when shifting from the closed state to the second open state, the specific prize opening 65a is rotated in the process of rotating the rotating member 650. Is temporarily directed to the first opening 681. When the game ball passes through the first opening portion 681 at this timing, the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a.

  Similarly, when the rotation member 650 is rotated in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7A) when shifting from the second open state to the closed state, the specific prize opening is rotated in the process of rotation of the rotation member 650. 65a is temporarily directed to the first opening 681. When the game ball passes through the first opening portion 681 at this timing, the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 650 is rotated in the other direction when shifting from the closed state to the second opened state, and the rotating member is moved when shifting from the second opened state to the closed state. By rotating 650 in one direction, it is possible to avoid a game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681 from entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, when the transition from the closed state to the second open state and the transition from the second open state to the closed state are performed, the specific winning opening 65a is directed downward and the rotary shaft 651a (see FIG. 4B). Rotate and displace on the circumference centered at. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition to this, the first closing portion 671 is extended to a position below the rotation shaft 651a of the rotating member 650, and the third closing portion 673 is provided below the second opening portion 682. The passed game ball can be easily guided to the out port 66 (see FIG. 2).

  In addition, the outer peripheral surface located in the front end side of the 2nd connection wall 654b and the 3rd connection wall 654c is recessedly formed in the circular arc shape which followed the shape of the game ball.

  As a result, when the rotating member 650 rotates in the other direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7A) (when shifting from the closed state to the second open state), the state shown in FIG. The game ball that has flowed down between the third connecting wall 654c and the third closing portion 673 in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is directed downward is scooped up by the outer peripheral surface of the tip portion of the third connecting wall 654c. Can do. In addition, until the transition to the second open state is completed, the ball entry portion until the outer peripheral surface of the third connection wall 654c is inclined downward from the tip portion of the rotating member 650 toward the first connection wall 654a. Since 652 is displaced, the scooped up game ball can roll on the outer peripheral surface of the third connecting wall 654c and flow down toward the ball discharge portion 683.

  This prevents the rotation of the rotating member 650 from being restricted due to the game ball flowing down between the third connecting wall 654c and the third closing portion 673 in the state shown in FIG. 7B. it can.

  In addition, when the rotating member 650 rotates in one direction (FIG. 7 (a) clockwise) (when the rotating member 650 shifts from the second open state to the closed state), the second connection in the state shown in FIG. 7 (b). The game ball that has flowed down between the wall 654b and the first closing portion 671 can be scooped up by the outer peripheral surface at the tip portion of the second connecting wall 654b. In addition, until the transition to the closed state is completed, the ball entry portion 652 is moved until the outer peripheral surface of the second connection wall 654b is inclined downward from the tip portion of the rotating member 650 toward the first connection wall 654a. Since it is displaced, the scooped up game ball can roll down on the outer peripheral surface of the second continuous wall 654 b and flow down toward the ball discharge portion 683.

  This prevents the rotation of the rotating member 650 from being restricted due to the game ball flowing down between the second connecting wall 654b and the first closing portion 671 in the state shown in FIG. 7B. it can.

  In addition, the inflow port 651b is formed in the disc portion 651, and the ball entry portion 652 is fixed to the disc portion 651, so that when the rotating member 650 is rotated, the inflow port 651b and the ball entry portion 652 are formed. Displaces integrally. That is, since it is possible to prevent the relative position between the incoming ball portion 652 and the inflow port 651b from being shifted, the game ball taken into the incoming ball portion 652 can be reliably guided to the inflow port 651b. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a game ball that flows away from the specific winning opening 65a and flows into the inflow port 651b.

  As described above, the first closing portion 671, the first opening portion 681, the second closing portion 672, the second opening portion 682, around the hole portion 13a in which the disc portion 651 of the rotating member 650 is accommodated, The third closing portion 673 and the ball-rejecting portion 683 are formed in this order, and the specific winning opening 65a is rotationally displaced along a circumference around the rotation shaft 651a.

  In the normal time, the variable prize device 65 is such that the rotating member 650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 65a directed to the first closing portion 671, and the inflow from the specific winning opening 65a to the inflow port 651b is restricted. On the other hand, when the big win ("big hit A" to "big hit D") is reached, the variable winning device 65 drives the drive motor M to rotate the rotating member 650, so that the specific winning opening 65a is the first opening portion. The first open state in which the player stops at a position directed to 681 or the second open state in which the specific winning opening 65a stops at a position directed to the second opening portion 682 is entered. As a result, the inflow from the specific winning port 65a to the inflow port 651b becomes possible.

  The variable winning device 65 is in an open state (a first open state or a first open state) in which a game ball is allowed to enter the specific winning port 65a from a closed state (normal state) in which the game ball is prevented from entering the specific winning port 65a. 2), the player is directed to change the manner in which the game ball is fired according to the displacement mode of the ball entry portion 652 (according to the direction in which the specific winning opening 65a is directed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the gaming enjoyed by the player.

  Further, since the second opening portion 682 can pass the game ball more easily because the flow path width is set to be larger than the first opening portion 681, the first opening state in the second opening state. It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. In this way, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific winning port 65a can be changed without changing the opening width of the specific winning port 65a (the facing distance between both end portions of the connecting wall 654). Since the structure for changing the opening width of the opening 65a can be made unnecessary, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified.

  Furthermore, since the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific winning port 65a can be changed depending on the displacement mode of the ball entering portion 652 (the direction in which the specific winning port 65 is directed), a variety of games can be achieved. .

  Further, since the inflow port 651b is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the game board 13, the game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a can be obtained by displacing the inflow port 651b in accordance with the direction of the specific winning port 65a. It can be smoothly taken into the inflow port 651b.

  Further, the inflow port 651b is formed in the disc portion 651, and the inflow port 651b is relatively displaced with respect to the game board 13 by operating the drive motor M to rotate the disc portion 651. The structure for enabling relative displacement with respect to the panel 13 can be simplified.

  Further, since the disc portion 651 is fixed to the ball entry portion 652 in which the inflow port 651b is formed, the specific winning port 65a and the inflow port 651b can be displaced integrally by the operation of the drive motor M. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the displacement of the displacement of the specific winning opening 65a and the displacement of the inflow port 651b, the game balls that have entered from the specific winning opening 65a can be smoothly taken into the inflow port 651b.

  Furthermore, both the inflow port 651b and the ball entry portion 652 (specific winning opening 65a) can be displaced by the drive motor M. That is, since both the inlet 651b and the ball entry portion 652 (specific winning opening 65a) can be displaced by one drive source, the inlet 651b and the ball entry portion 652 are displaced by different drive sources. In comparison, the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the control of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified.

  The conventional pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a jackpot game in which a prize ball that a player can obtain is variable by providing door type winning devices having different opening widths (lateral directions). It was. Further, the same winning device is provided at different positions (for example, below the entrance slot 64 and on the right side of the variable display unit 80) so that game balls from different downflow directions can easily enter ( For example, in the winning device provided below the entrance 64, the winning device provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is easy to enter the game ball flowing down the left side of the variable display unit 80. There was a game ball that flowed down on the right side.

  In the pachinko machine 10 described above, there are problems such as installation space and cost increase by providing a plurality of variable winning devices 65. However, the variable winning device 65 according to the present embodiment is configured by one variable winning device 65, but is configured to be variable in a state in which a game ball can easily enter from two different downflow directions. Also, since the opening widths are different, the frequency of entering a ball can be changed even if the same number of game balls reach the opening. Thus, although it has two types of different functions, since it is comprised with the one variable winning device 65, cost can be reduced. In addition, space saving can be realized.

  Next, the first passage 691 and the second passage 692 disposed on the back side of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a partially enlarged back view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line VIIIb-VIIIb of FIG. 8A. c) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line VIIIc-VIIIc of FIG. 8A schematically shows a view of the game board 13 viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the first open state and the second open state are shown in order to simplify the drawing and make the explanation easy to understand. The position of the inflow port 651b in FIG. FIG. 8B schematically shows a cross section of the game board 13 in a state where the variable winning device 65 has shifted to the first open state, and in FIG. 8C, the variable winning device 65 enters the second open state. A cross-section of the game board 13 in the transitioned state is schematically shown.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 655 is placed on the back side of the portion of the game board 13 where the hole 13a (see FIG. 5A) is formed on the front side. A first passage 691 and a second passage 692 are provided for transferring to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  The first passage 691 and the second passage 692 are groove-shaped members whose front side (the rear side in FIG. 8A) is opened, and the front side of the first passage 691 and the second passage 692 is a game board. A closed passage through which the game ball can be transferred is formed by abutting against the back surface side of 13.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the inflow port 651b and the first passage 691 communicate with each other when the variable winning device 65 is shifted to the first open state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and is accommodated in the accommodation portion 655 in the first open state is transferred from the inflow port 651b to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the first passage 691.

  The ball-entry portion 652 is inclined so that the inner peripheral surface of the first connecting wall 654a is separated from the specific winning port 65a toward the inflow port 651b. Thereby, in the 1st open state, the entrance part 652 stops in the state which the inner peripheral surface of the 1st connection wall 654a inclines and descended toward the inflow port 651b side from the opposing wall 653 side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and landed on the first connection wall 654a can be guided to the inflow port 651b by the inclination of the first connection wall 654a.

  Furthermore, in the first open state, the inner peripheral surface of the first connecting wall 654a and the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 651b are connected to be flush with each other, so that the game ball guided to the first connecting wall 654a is It is possible to smoothly guide from the inflow port 651b to the first passage 691.

  Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a continuously in a short time, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being jammed inside the housing portion 655.

  On the other hand, in the first opened state, the second passage 692 is closed by the disc portion 651, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 682 from flowing into the second passage 692.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, the inflow port 651b and the second passage 692 communicate with each other when the variable winning device 65 has shifted to the second open state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and is accommodated in the accommodation portion 655 in the second open state is transferred from the inflow port 651b to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the second passage 692.

  The ball entry portion 652 is inclined such that the inner peripheral surface of the second connection wall 654b is separated from the third connection wall 654c toward the inflow port 651b. Thereby, in the 2nd open state, the entrance part 652 stops in the state which the internal peripheral surface of the 2nd connection wall 654b inclined downward from the opposing wall 653 side toward the inflow port 651b. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and landed on the second connection wall 654b can be guided to the inflow port 651b side by the inclination of the second connection wall 654b.

  Furthermore, in the second open state, the inner peripheral surfaces of the first connecting wall 654a and the second connecting wall 654b and the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 651b are connected to be flush with each other. The guided game ball can be smoothly guided from the inflow port 651b to the second passage 692.

  Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a continuously in a short time, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being jammed inside the housing portion 655.

  On the other hand, in the second open state, the first passage 691 is closed by the disc portion 651. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the first opening 681 from flowing into the first passage 691.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the game ball is a specific winning opening when the jackpot type is “Big Jack B” or “Big Jack D” than when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A” or “Big Jack C”. The number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the ball 65a is set to be large. As a result, a different game value is given because .... Therefore, diversification of games can be achieved, so that gameability enjoyed by the player can be improved.

When the jackpot type is “Big Jack A” or “Big Jack C”, the specific winning opening 65a is in the first open state directed to the first opening portion 681, passes through the first opening portion 681, and the specific winning opening 65a. While the game ball that entered the ball flows into the inflow port 651b and is taken into the first passage 691, in the case where the big hit type is “hit B” or “hit D”, the specific winning opening 65a is opened second. The second open state directed to the part 682, the game ball that has passed through the second open part 682 and entered the specific winning opening 65a flows into the inflow port 651b and is taken into the second passage 692. In the first open state, the game ball is taken into the first passage 691, whereas in the second open state, the game ball is taken into the second passage 692. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine in which jackpot type the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is a game ball that has entered.

  In the present embodiment, separate passages (first passage 691, second passage) are provided for the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a in the first open state and the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a in the second open state. In the first open state, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a and the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a in the second open state are taken into a common passage. It may be configured.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and a display on the second symbol display device 83. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the like.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Are used, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a composed of four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing special symbol reservation balls. There is an area. Each area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter C2 in accordance with the timing of entering the start opening (first start opening 64, second start opening 640). Each value is stored.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

  Here, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller, and FIG. 11B schematically shows a part of the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a in the main controller, and FIG. 12B shows the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202b in the main controller. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal hit random number table 202c in the main controller.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and can take a maximum value (for example, a value of 0 to 299). In the case of (3), after reaching 299), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 (see FIG. 10) at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the start opening. Stored. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special symbol jackpot random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The special symbol jackpot random number table for the special symbol with high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table for the special symbol with the low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the start opening. Stored in

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is set to four types of “big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit C”, and “big hit D”, and “first jackpot A” is set by the first hit type counter C2. Any one of “big hit B”, “big hit C”, and “big hit D” is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that is a special symbol jackpot when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7” is a special symbol jackpot random number table for a low probability time. Stored in In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0-9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first hit type counter C2 set in the big hit type selection table (not shown), the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 20” is “hit A” and the random value is “21 to 20”. The jackpot type in the case of “59” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the random value is “60-80” is “jackpot C”, and the jackpot type when the random value is “81-99” is “jackpot D”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table 202b, which is the main controller 110. The ROM 202 is provided.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation display counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right through gate 67, and the RAM 203 Are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by the normal hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set by the normal hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is won, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, the normal random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability (a normal symbol of the normal symbol) that has a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. Further, the normal symbol type and the long time type are set as the normal symbol type, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hit gaming state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the opened state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. Further, during the time shortening and the probability variation period, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in an open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second start port 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second start port 640 is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times” is very long, the ball easily enters the second start port 640a. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second start port 640 is opened for “2 seconds × twice” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Here, the ROM in the main controller will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main controller, and FIG. 11B schematically shows a part of the contents of the RAM in the main controller. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, The middle counter 203e, the probability variation flag 203f, the rotation amount storage area 203g, the rotation position storage area 203h, the round counter 203i, the release flag 203j, the step counter 203k, the excitation counter 203l, and the other memory area 203z Have.

  The special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a has one execution area for special symbols and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the start opening (first start opening 64, second start opening 640), and the acquired data Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering (start winning prize) of the starting port (the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81). The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 each time the ball enters the start port and the number of held balls for variable display increases. On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 15).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 15 and S405 in FIG. 18). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 19).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, the second random number counter C4 The value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 20 S703: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203e.

  The probability change flag 203f is a flag that is set to ON when the gaming state is probability change.

  In the rotation amount storage area 203g, when the special control lottery is executed in the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the rotation member 650 in the variable winning device 65 set according to the big hit type is set. This is an area in which the value of the rotation amount is stored.

  When the big hit type is “big hit A” or “big hit C”, a setting value (drive motor rotation amount data) of “2” is stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g. This is because the rotating member 650 is rotated 40 degrees in one direction (FIG. 6 (a) clockwise) from the origin position (see FIG. 6 (a)), and from the closed state shown in FIG. 6 (a) to FIG. It is control data which shows shifting to the 1st open state shown in (b).

  On the other hand, when the big hit type is “big hit B” or “big hit D”, the set value (drive motor rotation amount data) of “−13” is stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g. This is because the rotating member 650 is rotated 260 degrees from the origin position (see FIG. 6 (a)) in the other direction (FIG. 6 (a) counterclockwise direction), from the closed state shown in FIG. 6 (a) to FIG. It is control data which shows shifting to the 2nd open state shown to (a).

  In the rotation amount storage area 203g, drive motor rotation amount data corresponding to each jackpot type is set by the processing of S324, S326, S330, and S332 of the jackpot setting processing (FIG. 17, S212) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Is done. Based on the value of the drive motor rotation amount data, it is determined whether a step counter 203k and an excitation counter 203l, which will be described later, are added or subtracted, and the respective data are updated to thereby update the drive motor M (stepping motor). ) Is determined, and the output of the drive motor (pulse signal) is set. In the present embodiment, based on the excitation counter 203l, drive data is output to a motor driver (not shown) of the drive motor M, and control of the drive motor M is executed. Since the control of the drive motor is already known, its details are omitted.

  In the rotational position storage area 203h, a rotational position of the rotational member 650 detected by the rotational position detection sensor S (see FIG. 9), that is, a detection value related to the direction of the specific winning opening 65a is stored.

  The rotational position detection sensor S is electrically connected to the input / output port of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and is composed of a rotary encoder that can measure the rotational angle of the rotational member 650. The rotational position detection sensor S is attached to the drive shaft Ma (see FIG. 4B) of the drive motor M, and is configured to detect the amount of rotation of the drive shaft Ma. When the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (the state where the specific winning opening 65a is directed to the first closing portion 671, see FIG. 6A), 0 (origin position) is set, and the rotation angle from the origin position Is stored.

  Further, in this embodiment, for easy understanding, the rotation position of the rotation member 650 is divided into 18 stages, and “0 to 17” is stored in the rotation position storage area 203h according to the detection value by the rotation position detection sensor S. "Is stored. For example, when the rotating member 650 is located at a position rotated 20 degrees in one direction (340 degrees in the other direction) from the origin position, “1” is stored as a detection value in the rotating position storage area 203h. When the position is rotated 240 degrees in one direction (120 degrees in the other direction) from the origin position, “12” is stored as a detection value in the rotation position storage area 203h.

  The round counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of rounds executed during the jackpot presentation. During the jackpot presentation, 1 is added to the round counter 203i every time a round presentation for one round is started. When the round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received via the audio lamp controller 113, a value corresponding to the round number extracted from the round number command is stored. Specifically, if round 1, value 1 is stored, and if round 16, value 16 is stored.

  The opening flag 203j is a flag indicating that the variable winning device 65 is in an open permission state (a ball entering state) in which the variable winning device 65 may be opened. This open flag 203j is set to ON when the variable winning device 65 is shifted from the closed state to the open state (first open state or second open state), and when the specific winning port 65 is open ( (See S1105 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the condition for closing the variable winning device 65 is satisfied (in this embodiment, 10 balls are won or 30 seconds have elapsed), the variable winning device 65 is set to OFF.

  The step counter 203k is a storage area for storing the number of steps (number of pulses) from the origin position of the drive motor M constituted by a stepping motor. When the excitation counter 203l is incremented by 1 (when the drive motor M is rotated by one pulse in the forward rotation direction (one direction)), the step counter 203k is incremented by 1 and updated. Conversely, when the excitation counter 203l is decremented by 1 (when the drive motor M is rotated by one pulse in the reverse rotation direction (the other direction)), it is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, at the time of initial setting such as when the power is turned on, the rotation member 650 is rotated in the forward rotation direction so that the rotation member 650 is at the origin position (in this embodiment, the position shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the rotational position detection sensor S detects a position rotated by 320 degrees in one direction (FIG. 6 (b) clockwise direction) from a position (see FIG. 6 (b)) in which 65a faces directly above, The initial value 0 is set in the step counter 203k, and in this way, it is determined how many pulses and in which direction the drive motor M is rotated from the origin position based on the value stored in the step counter 203k. It is the structure which can do.

  In the present embodiment, a state rotated 40 degrees in one direction from the closed state is referred to as a first open state, and a state rotated 260 degrees in the other direction from the closed state is referred to as a second open state. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A” or “jackpot C”, when the variable winning device 65 is shifted from the closed state to the first opened state, it is stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g. “2” is stored (see S324 and S330 in FIG. 17), and the drive motor M is rotated in one direction until the value in the rotation position storage area 203h becomes “2”, and the rotating member 650 is rotated in one direction. Let Further, when the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit D” and the variable winning device 65 is shifted from the closed state to the second open state, “−13” is stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g. Is stored (see S326 and S332 in FIG. 17), and the drive motor M is driven to rotate in the other direction and the rotating member 650 is rotated in the other direction until the value in the rotational position storage area 203h becomes “−13” (see FIG. 17). S1123 to S1126 in FIG.

  Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the big hit type is “big hit A” or “big hit C”, when the variable winning device 65 is shifted from the first open state to the closed state, the amount of rotation is stored. Until “0” is stored in the area 203g and the value in the rotational position storage area 203h becomes “0”, the drive motor M is rotated in the other direction, and the rotating member 650 is rotated in the other direction. When the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit D” and the variable winning device 65 is shifted from the second open state to the closed state, “0” is stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g. The drive motor M is rotated in one direction and the rotating member 650 is rotated in one direction until the value stored in the rotation position storage area 203h becomes “0” (S1129, S1131 to S1133 in FIG. 26).

  The excitation counter 203l is a counter for setting drive data for rotationally driving the drive motor M, and obtains excitation control data every time the excitation counter 203l is updated from an excitation table (not shown). The motor M is driven and controlled to rotate the rotating member 650.

  Specifically, the excitation counter 203l is a counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 359, and the corresponding excitation control data is output based on the counter value, and the layer to be excited is determined based on the counter value. Instructed excitation control data is output. In the present embodiment, the value of the excitation counter 203l is updated by being added from “0”, and when it is updated to “0” again, the 360 ° drive motor M is configured to rotate. Thereby, the rotation amount in one pulse is 1 degree. Further, since the excitation control data output corresponding to the value of the excitation counter 203l individually indicates the layer to be excited, the drive motor M can be updated by subtracting and updating the value of the excitation counter 203l. Will rotate once in one direction.

  Returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, a drive motor M, a rotational position detection sensor S, and the like. Connected, the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid (launching means) and an electromagnet (adjusting means) (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and fluctuating effects (variation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device, and FIG. 13B is a schematic view showing a part of the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram shown in.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and an effect counter 223e. The jackpot type storage area 223f and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The effect counter 223e is a counter that is set within the range of “0 to 198” according to the jackpot type when the special symbol is a jackpot, and if it is “0 to 49”, it is a notification determination value. Assuming there is a display launch notification command based on the special symbol jackpot type.

  The jackpot type storage area 223f stores the jackpot type (any one of “jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) when the special symbol is a jackpot.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, drives various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid 209 for driving an electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2), a motor 12 volts for driving, etc., 5 volts for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and the control devices 110 to 114 use these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltages. Supply the necessary voltage to

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 21) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, 399, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the start opening (first start opening 64, second start opening 640) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type (any one of “jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the “big hit A” or “big hit C” is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the “big hit B” or “big hit D” is reached. Turn on the red LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows: It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), a jackpot setting process is executed (S212). The jackpot setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S211, if the current lottery result is not a big hit (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S213) and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more. If this is the case (S213: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / middle counter 203e (S214), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203e is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 15) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is performed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the “jackpot A” or “jackpot B”. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “7” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits the same match, Judged to be a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, and the big jackpot (“big hit A ”To“ Big jackpot D ”), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 20”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), If it is in the range of 21 to 59, it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, a probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), and if it is in the range of 60 to 80, the jackpot C (16R If it is in the range of “81 to 99”, it is determined that it is “big hit D (16R big hit, 100 short time period of normal symbol)”.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type ("big hit A" to "big hit D"). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type ("big hit A" to "big hit D") is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as the variation time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is present, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the jackpot setting process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This jackpot setting process (S212) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 15) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). In accordance with the type, the rotation amount of the rotation member 650 (the rotation amount of the drive motor M) is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g, and a jackpot type command is set.

  In the jackpot setting process (S212), first, a jackpot flag (not shown) is set to ON (S321). This jackpot flag is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot game is being played. When it is determined that the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the specific symbol variation start process is a special symbol jackpot, among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D) It is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S322).

  In the process of S322, if the current lottery result is jackpot A or jackpot B (S322: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON (S323), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A. (S324).

  In the process of S323, if the current lottery result is a jackpot A (S324: Yes), the value “2” of the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is set based on the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B). The rotation amount storage area 203g is set (S325). After the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g by the processing of S325, a big hit type command indicating the big hit A is set (S326), and this processing is terminated.

  In the process of S324, if the current lottery result is not the big hit A (S324: No), the current lottery result is the big hit B, so the value “−13” of the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is based on the big hit type selection table 202b. "Is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g (S327). After the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g by the processing of S327, a big hit type command indicating the big hit B is set (S328), and this processing is terminated.

  In the process of S322, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is a special symbol jackpot, four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A To D), when the jackpot type is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S322: No), the jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot D. In this case, 100 is set in the hour / middle counter 203e (S329).

  After 100 is set in the hour / medium counter by the processing of S329, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the current lottery result is jackpot C (S330).

  In the process of S330, if the current lottery result is a big hit C (S330: Yes), based on the big hit type selection table 202b, the value “2” of the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g. (S331). After the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g by the processing of S331, a big hit type command indicating the big hit C is set (S332), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S330, if the current lottery result is not the big hit C (S330: No), the current lottery result is the big hit D, so the value “−13” of the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is based on the big hit type selection table 202b. "Is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g (S333). After the rotation amount data of the drive motor M is set in the rotation amount storage area 203g by the processing of S333, a big hit type command indicating the big hit D is set (S334), and this processing ends.

  Thus, based on the fact that the jackpot flag is set to ON, the drive motor M is controlled according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the control of the drive motor M can be simplified.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the start opening (first start opening 64, second start opening 640). Then, when there is a start winning, a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a prefetch of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a start opening (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the start port is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the start opening (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  If there is no winning at the start opening (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the starting opening, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No). , The process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start opening (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c. 1 is added to (N) (S404). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S407, the determination result of the validity at the start of the change is determined based on the value of each counter acquired in the process of S405 (S407). A determination is made regarding the result of the determination as to whether the determination is made in S407 (S408). If it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S408: Yes), a jackpot winning command is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination is not successful (S408: No), a winning winning command is set (S410). After the processing of S409 and S410 is finished, this processing is finished.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second start port 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) being hit includes when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit and during the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour / short counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot.

  This is because, during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits a ball to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting opening 640 is released. This is to prevent the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a from entering the first start opening 64 as much as possible. The specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first starting port 64, so even if the ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 640 during the special symbol jackpot, 64 has many balls. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal design.

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 21-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal design.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second starting port 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the second start port 640 Is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, The number of releases is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the second start port 640 Is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, The number of releases is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the opening period of the second start port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second start port 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S625, the electric accessory 640a of the other processing (see S1134) of the electric accessory operation processing (S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) is performed next. When the opening / closing process is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the opening frequency set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. Is done. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703). : No), the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. In addition, an initial operation process is performed in which the drive motor M is rotated in the clockwise direction so that the rotation position detection sensor S rotates 0 degrees, which is the origin position, to the detection position. If the rotational position detection sensor S does not detect the origin position even if the drive motor M is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), an error flag or the like is set to ON, and after the start-up process is completed, An error process for displaying an alarm sound or displaying an error on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, a rotary encoder is used as the rotational position detection sensor S. However, a protruding piece or the like indicating the origin position is provided on the rotating member 650, and the protruding piece when the rotating member 650 reaches the origin position. May be configured to set the origin position by turning on (or turning off) the photosensor. In such a configuration, the value of the step counter that controls the stepping motor is reset based on the detection of the origin position, and the rotational position of the rotating member 650 is determined and controlled by the value of the step counter. Configure. By comprising in this way, since the rotational position detection sensor S becomes unnecessary, cost can be reduced.

  Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S913. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, a jackpot return process for returning the rotational position of the rotating member 650 to the state when the power is shut off is executed, and then the process proceeds to S911. The jackpot return process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the jackpot return process (S910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot return process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This jackpot return process is a process executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 22), and is a case where the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on when the power is shut off. Is cut off, the rotational position of the rotating member 650 is returned to the state when the power is cut off.

  In the big hit return process (S910), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S921).

  In the process of S921, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S921: Yes), the RAM initialization process is executed, and the rotating member 650 cannot be returned to the power-off state. End the process. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S921: No), the RAM initialization process has not been executed, and it is next determined whether or not a jackpot flag (not shown) is turned on. (S922).

  In the process of S922, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (S922: No), it is determined that the specific winning port 65a is closed (the variable winning device 65 was closed) when the power is shut off. This process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is turned on (S922: Yes), it is determined that the special symbol jackpot state (entered state) was detected when the power supply was cut off during the special symbol jackpot, and then released. It is determined whether or not the flag 203j is turned on (S923).

  In the process of S923, if the release flag 203j is not turned on, it is determined that the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, if the release flag 203j is turned on (S923: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state (first open state or second open state), or is closed from the closed state to the open state or from the open state. It can be determined that the power supply was cut off during the transition to the state. In this case, the process proceeds to S906, and based on the rotation amount data of the drive motor M stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g and the rotation position data of the rotation member 650 stored in the rotation position storage area 203h. The drive data of the drive motor M is set (S924), and this process ends.

  In this way, in the jackpot return processing (FIG. 23, S910), when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is determined from the backed up information whether the state before the power was turned off was a big hit. If it is a big hit, a process of returning the specific winning opening 65a to the open state before the power is turned off is executed. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to an unexpected failure such as a power failure during the jackpot game, the open state is configured to be restored, so that the player's profit is protected. Can do. Therefore, since a game with high fairness can be provided, a player's dissatisfaction can be reduced and a game with a sense of security can be provided.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 15) or the start winning process (see FIG. 18) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process (S1004) and an electric accessory actuating process (S1005) for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a and the like of the winning device 65 are executed. In the jackpot control process (S1004) and the electric accessory actuating process (S1005), the rotating member 650 of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for each round of the jackpot state to open the specific winning port 65a, and the specific winning port 65a is opened to the maximum. It is determined whether time has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions (closing condition) is established, the rotating member 650 is rotated to close the specific winning opening 65a. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 16), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 16) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 16). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 19), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 19) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 21 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main storage device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main storage device 110. This jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 24), and starts switching the variable winning device 65 from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state. It is a process to do.

  In the jackpot control process (S1004), it is first determined whether or not it is determined whether or not a jackpot flag (not shown) has been switched from OFF to ON (S1101). As to the determination of whether or not the switch has been switched from OFF to ON, the previous determination value is stored, and the determination is performed by comparing with the value.

  In the process of S1101, when the jackpot flag is switched from off to on (S1101: Yes), the special symbol lottery result performed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) becomes a jackpot, and a new jackpot game Therefore, the value (16 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the type of jackpot of the special symbol is set in the round counter 203i (S1102), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not switched from off to on in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), that is, if the jackpot flag remains off or remains on, then the jackpot flag is on. It is determined whether or not (S1103).

  In the processing of S1103, if the jackpot flag is not on (S1103: No), it is determined that the special symbol is not being jackpoted, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is on in the processing of S1103 (S1103: Yes), then it is time to start opening the specific winning opening 65a (the second and subsequent new rounds are started). It is determined whether or not it is a timing for starting the transition from the closed state to the open state of the variable winning device 65 (S1104).

  In the process of S1104, if it is the timing for starting the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (S1104: Yes), the release flag 203j is set to ON (S1105). After the release flag 203j is set to ON by the processing of S1105, a round command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106), and then 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter 203i (S1107). The process ends.

  Note that when the release flag 203j is set to ON, a process for rotating the rotating member 650 is executed in an electric accessory actuating process (FIG. 26, S1005) described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1104, if it is not the timing for starting the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (S1104: No), then it is the timing for closing the variable winning device 65 (from the open state of the variable winning device 65) It is determined whether it is time to start the transition to the closed state (S1108).

  In the process of S1108, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a are not satisfied (S1108: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the release flag 203j is set to off (S1109), and then the closing flag is set to on ( S1110), the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the electric accessory operation process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main storage device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory actuating process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main storage device 110. This electric accessory actuating process (S1005) is a process executed after the jackpot control process S1004 (see FIG. 23) in the main process (see FIG. 24), and the drive motor M is selected according to the jackpot type. Is a process for rotating the rotating member 650.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the electric accessory actuating process (S1005), it is first determined whether or not the release flag 203j is on (S1121).

In the process of S1121, if the release flag 203j is on (S1121: Yes), based on the detection result of the rotational position detection sensor S, the rotational position of the rotational member 650 is set in the rotational position storage area 203h (S1122). Specifically, the rotational position of the rotating member 650 relative to the origin position is detected by the rotational position detection sensor S, and a detection value corresponding to the detection result is set in the rotational position storage area 20h. Instead of setting the detection value of the rotation position detection sensor S, the value of the step counter 203k may be set in the rotation position storage area 20h. In this case, in the next step S1123, the rotation angle of the rotating member 650 is determined based on the value indicated by the step counter 203k.

  When the process of S1122 is completed, the rotation position of the rotating member 650 (the value stored in the rotation position storage area 203h) set in the rotation position storage area 203h in the process of S1122 and the rotation amount storage area 203g are set. It is determined whether or not the rotation amount of the drive motor M (the value of the rotation amount data of the drive motor M stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g) matches (S1123).

  In the process of S1122, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h matches the rotation amount of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g (S1023: Yes). ), It is determined that the variable winning device 65 is in the open state (the transition to the first open state (see FIG. 6B) or the second open state (see FIG. 7A) has been completed). Therefore, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1122, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h does not match the rotation amount of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g (S1124). : No), since it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is in the process of shifting from the closed state to the first open state or the second open state, the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is then determined. It is determined whether or not the rotation amount data is a negative value (S1124).

  In the process of S1124, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a positive value (S1124: No), the variable winning device 65 shifts from the closed state to the first open state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in one direction (FIG. 7 (a) clockwise).

  Therefore, in order to drive the drive motor M and rotate the rotating member 650 in one direction, 1 is added to the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l (S1125), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  On the other hand, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a negative value in the processing of S1124 (S1124: Yes), the variable winning device 65 is changed from the closed state to the second open state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7A) during the transition.

  Therefore, in order to drive the drive motor M and rotate the rotating member 650 in the other direction, 1 is subtracted from the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l (S1126), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  If the release flag 203j is not on in the process of S1121 (S1121: No), it is then determined whether or not the closing flag is on (S1127).

  In the process of S1127, if the closing flag is not on (S1127: No), it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (the transition to the closed state has been completed), so this process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the closing flag is on in the processing of S1127 (S1127: Yes), it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is in the process of shifting from the first open state or the second open state to the closed state. Therefore, the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 is set in the rotation position storage area 203h (S1128). Specifically, as in the process of S1122, the rotation position of the rotation member 650 with respect to the origin position is detected by the rotation position detection sensor S, and a value corresponding to the detection result is stored in the rotation position storage area 203h.

  In this case as well, the value of the step counter 203k may be set in the rotational position storage area 203 instead of setting the detection of the rotational position detection sensor S.

  When the processing of S1128 ends, whether the rotational position of the rotating member 650 set in the rotational position storage area 203h in the processing of S1128 is the origin position, that is, the value stored in the rotational position storage area 203h is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S1129).

  In the process of S1129, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h is the origin position (the value set in the rotation position storage area 203h is “0”) (S1129: Yes), Since it is determined that the shift from the open state (the first open state or the second open state) of the variable winning device 65 to the closed state is completed, the closing flag is set to OFF (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1134. To do.

  On the other hand, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h is not the origin position in the processing of S1129 (S1127: No), the variable winning device 65 is in the first open state or the second open state. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a negative value (S1131).

  In the process of S1131, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a negative value (S1131: Yes), the variable winning device 65 shifts from the first open state to the closed state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7A) in the middle.

  Therefore, in order to drive the drive motor M to rotate the rotating member 650 in the other direction, 1 is subtracted from the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l (S1132), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1131, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a positive value (S1131: No), the variable winning device 65 is changed from the second open state to the closed state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in one direction (FIG. 7A, the clockwise direction) during the transition.

  Therefore, in order to drive the drive motor M and rotate the rotating member 650 in one direction, 1 is added to the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l (S1133), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  In the process of S1134, for example, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second start port 640 is executed. In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in FIG.

  As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the closed state (see FIG. 6A) is shifted to the first open state (see FIG. 6B), the rotating member 650 is moved in one direction (FIG. 6). When rotating from the closed state to the second open state (see FIG. 7A), the rotating member 650 is moved in the other direction (FIG. 6A counterclockwise direction). ). By comprising in this way, when changing from a closed state to a 1st open state, it can transfer to a 1st open state, without passing through a 2nd open state. Similarly, when shifting from the closed state to the second open state, it is possible to shift to the second open state without going through the first open state.

<Regarding Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1316 (see FIG. 28) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1313 in FIG. 28), it executes a power-off process in S1316. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1316 is in the middle of execution can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1316 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current ramp-up process is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1316, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1316 is executed (see S1315 in FIG. 28). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1316 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1316 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the change display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1312 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1317 (S1313: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also deleted (S1317).

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S1313 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), the fluctuation pattern is extracted based on the received fluctuation pattern command (S1403), and the process returns to the main process. .

  If it is determined in step S1401 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). In the process of S1407, when the reservation ball number command is not received (S1407: No), the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), data indicating the jackpot type based on the received jackpot type command is set in the jackpot type storage area 223f (S1408).

  After the processing of S1408 is completed, the effect counter 223e is acquired (S1409), and it is determined whether or not the acquired effect counter is a notification determination value (S1410). If the effect counter 223e is not the notification determination value in the process of S1410 (S1410: No), the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if the effect counter 223e is a notification determination value (if the value of the effect counter 223e is “0 to 49”), a display firing notification command is set based on the jackpot type.

  With this display firing notification command, the player is notified of how to launch a game ball (“left-handed” or “right-handed”) according to the type of jackpot before the jackpot game is started. The player can easily enter the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a by performing a method of launching the game ball according to the notification.

  In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 draws lots whether or not to notify how to play the game ball based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223e. Can make a person feel the value of a jackpot high or low.

  That is, when there is a notification, the variable winning device 65 changes from the closed state (see FIG. 6A) to the first open state (FIG. 6B) or the second open state (see FIG. 7A). The player can know which open state is to be entered before the rotation of the rotating member 650 (see FIG. 5B) is started. Therefore, when there is a limit on the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a for each round, it is possible to adjust the way the game balls are fired early by being notified, so that more gaming balls can be assigned to the specific winning opening. 65a can be entered.

  On the other hand, if there is no notification, the variable winning device 65 knows from the start of the rotation of the rotary member 650 whether the variable winning device 65 is shifted from the closed state to the first open state or the second open state. become.

  As described above, since the game can be diversified by performing the lottery regarding the presence / absence of the notification by the sound lamp control device 114, the gameability enjoyed by the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum time for one round is 30 seconds, but it may be set as short as 10 seconds, for example. In this case, by notifying the player of the direction of firing earlier, the player can enter (win) a lot of game balls into the specific winning opening 65a, thus increasing the value given to the player. be able to.

  If the jackpot type command has not been received in the process of S1407 (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1412). Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1506. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. Obtain (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. Further, the notice contents selected here are also notified.

  In the processing of S1506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on. If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1507), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. The display for obtaining and notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508). A stop type command for use is generated and set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S1509). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1509 is executed, this process ends.

<Variation 1 of the first embodiment>
Next, Modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the timing at which the rotating member 650 is rotated is limited at the start of the big hit game. However, in the first modification, a specific variation pattern (in this embodiment, a super reach variation pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, and the rotation member is displayed at the timing when the variation display ends (the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed). The 650 is configured to quickly reciprocate four times by 5 degrees in the left-right direction (clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction).

  With this configuration, even when a ball clog occurs between the nail of the rotating member 650 and the opening, the ball clog can be periodically eliminated.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the process of S209 of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (S209: Yes), the variation occurs. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern that has been the super-reaching fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the type of the fluctuation pattern that has fluctuated is super reach, the swing operation flag is set to ON. This shaking operation flag is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the operation of preventing the ball clogging of the rotating member 650 (the operation of rapidly reciprocating four times to the left and right four times). Thereafter, the process of S210 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of the fluctuation pattern that has changed is not super reach, the process of S210 is executed.

  Further, a shaking operation execution process is added after the process of S1003 of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this shaking motion execution process, first, it is determined whether or not the shaking motion flag is on. When it is determined that the shaking operation flag is ON, the shaking operation execution data is set for the stepping motor. As the shaking operation execution data, data that is rotated by 5 degrees in the left-right direction is set. The data is configured so that a predetermined number of steps is automatically output to the motor driver of the stepping motor. Thereafter, the swing operation flag is set to OFF, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the swing operation flag is OFF, this process is terminated.

  Further, at the beginning of the jackpot control process (S1004), it is determined whether the shaking operation flag is on, and the subsequent processing is skipped until the shaking operation flag is turned off. With this configuration, it is possible to delay the opening operation of the jackpot operation (the rotating member 650) until the swinging operation is completed.

  In this modification, since the swinging operation is executed after the change of the super reach, the rotating member 650 is operated after the super reach having a relatively high probability of being selected in the case of the big hit. The person can expect that the determination result is a big hit. Thereafter, when the determination result is a big hit, the rotating member 650 starts the opening operation. On the other hand, if the determination result is an unacceptable variation pattern, only the shaking operation ends and the next special symbol variation start is executed. As a result, when the swinging operation is executed, the player can expect which side to turn to a big hit.

  In addition, Super Reach is configured so that it can be easily selected during a short time after a big hit game or during a probable change state, so it can perform a swinging operation after a big hit game where ball clogging is likely to occur, and quickly eliminates ball clogging. it can.

<Modification 2 of the first embodiment>
Next, Modification 2 of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, it has been described that the jackpot A and the jackpot C are configured to rotate at a constant speed in the clockwise direction, and the jackpot B and the jackpot D in the counterclockwise direction. However, in the second modification, the rotation member 650 is rotated clockwise in the big hits A to D, and the number of game balls entering the entrance 653 in the case of the big hit is variable depending on the rotation time. Configured to do.

  Specifically, in the case of big hit A and big hit C, it continues to rotate in the clockwise direction for 5 seconds, and then rotates counterclockwise to return to the ball entry restriction position. Further, if the big hit B or big hit D, it continues to rotate in the clockwise direction for 10 seconds, and then rotates counterclockwise to return to the ball entry restriction position.

  In the second modification, when the rotating member 650 rotates clockwise for 5 seconds, the entrance 653 is rotated at a speed that rotates to a position facing the opening 681 (about 40 degrees). The On the other hand, the rotating member 650 is rotated at a speed such that the rotating member 650 is rotated (100 degrees) to a position facing the entrance 682 for 10 seconds. As described above, when the number of rotation seconds increases, an opening period during which a game ball can enter the entrance 653 becomes longer, so that the game ball can enter the entrance 653 more.

  In the second modification, the opening times are set for jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot B and jackpot D, but the invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpot, the opening times are determined by lottery from a plurality of opening times. You may comprise.

<Modification 3 of the first embodiment>
Next, Modification 3 of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 650 is configured so that the jackpot A and jackpot C, the jackpot B, and jackpot D are at the same speed. However, in the third modification, the rotating member 650 is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise so that the time required for the entrance 653 to reach the positions facing the opening 681 and the opening 682 is the same. It is the structure which varies the speed to perform.

  Specifically, when rotated clockwise, the position rotated by 40 degrees becomes the open position, and when rotated counterclockwise, the position rotated by 260 degrees becomes the open position. Therefore, the speed of turning counterclockwise is set to 6.5 times the speed of turning clockwise. With this configuration, the speed at which the entrance 653 is in the open position can be made the same even if the jackpot type changes.

  Therefore, the actual jackpot game start time until the jackpot game is started and the player can enter the game ball into the entrance 653 can be the same even if the jackpot type is different. . Therefore, since the time when the jackpot game is started and the game ball can be entered can be made substantially the same, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player has to wait for a long time to fire the game ball.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where both ends of the connecting wall 654 are located at the outer edge portion of the disc portion 651 has been described. However, in the second embodiment, both ends of the connecting wall 654 are more circular than the outer edge of the disc portion 651. The plate portion 651 projects outward in the radial direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the variable winning device 2065 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front view of the variable winning device 2065 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a side view of the variable winning device 2065 as viewed from the XXXIb direction of FIG. 31C is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 2065 along the line XXXIc-XXXIc in FIG. 31B, and FIG. 31D is the variable winning device along the line XXXId-XXXId in FIG. FIG. In addition, in FIG.31 (b) and FIG.31 (d), the drive motor M is typically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the variable winning device 2065 mainly includes a rotating member 2650 and a driving motor M that are rotatably held with respect to the game board 2013 (see FIG. 32A).

  The rotating member 2650 includes a disc portion 651 and a ball entry portion 2652 that is fixed to the front side of the disc portion 651 (the lower side in FIG. 31B).

  The ball entry portion 2652 includes an opposing wall 2653 disposed to face the front side of the disc portion 651 and a connecting wall 2654 that connects the opposing wall 2653 to the disc portion 651.

  The facing wall 2653 is disposed at a position corresponding to the inflow port 651b in the front view of the rotating member 2650, and the facing distance from the disc portion 651 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The connection wall 2654 is a part for restricting the passage of the game ball, and extends in a substantially U shape in front view along the periphery of the inflow port 651b. Both ends of the connecting wall 2654 project outward in the radial direction of the disc portion 651 from the outer edge portion of the disc portion 651, and the outer diameter of the game ball is 2 between the both ends of the connecting wall 2654. There are more than double intervals.

  In the ball entry portion 2652, an opening region formed between both end portions of the connecting wall 2654 is configured as a specific winning opening 65a, and the specific winning opening 65a is disposed outside the disc portion 651. The game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 2065a is accommodated in the accommodating portion 655 that is an internal space surrounded by the opposing wall 653 and the connecting wall 654.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the arrangement relationship between the game board 2013 and the variable winning device 2065 will be described. 32 and 33 are partially enlarged front views of the game board 2013. FIG. 32A shows the game board 2013 before the variable winning device 2065 is installed, and FIG. 32B shows the game board 2013 with the variable winning device 2065 installed. Has been. Also, in FIG. 32 (a), the illustration of the first passage 691 and the second passage 692 (see FIG. 8 (a)) disposed on the back side of the game board 2013 is omitted to simplify the drawing. ing. FIG. 32B shows the game board 2013 in the closed state, FIG. 33A shows the game board 2013 in the first open state, and FIG. 33B shows the game board 2013 in the second open state. In order to simplify the drawing and make the description easy to understand, the ball entrance portion 2652 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, around the hole 13a, there are a first closing part 2671 formed on the left side of the hole 13a and a second closing part 2672 formed on the upper right side of the hole 13a. A third closing portion 2673 formed on the lower right side of the hole portion 13a, and a first opening portion 2681 formed between the first closing portion 2671 and the second closing portion 2672 and above the hole portion 13a. A second opening 2682 formed between the second closing part 2672 and the third closing part 2673 and to the right of the hole 13a, and between the first closing part 2671 and the third closing part 2673. A ball discharge portion 2683 formed below the hole portion 13a is formed.

  The first closing portion 2671, the second closing portion 2672, and the third closing portion 2673 are portions that restrict the inflow of the game ball into the inflow hole 651b, and the first opening portion 2681, the second opening portion 2682, and the ball discharging portion 2683. Is a portion configured as a flow path through which a game ball can pass.

  The first closing portion 2671, the second closing portion 2672, and the third closing portion 2673 are each constituted by a plurality of nails planted in the game board 2013 so as to surround the hole portion 13a, and the plurality of nails are adjacent to each other. The distance between the nails is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The first opening portion 2681 includes a nail N21 disposed at a position closest to the second closing portion 2672 among a plurality of nails constituting the first closing portion 2671, and a nail constituting the second closing portion 2672. It is a flow path formed between the nail N22 disposed at a position close to the first closing portion 2671.

  The first opening portion 2681 has a channel width (interval between the nail N21 and the nail N22) set to a dimension slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The second opening portion 2682 includes a nail N23 disposed at a position close to the third closing portion 2673 among the two nails constituting the second closing portion 2672, and a plurality of nails constituting the third closing portion 2673. Among these, the flow path is formed between the nail N24 and the nail N24 disposed closest to the second closing portion 2672.

  The second opening portion 2682 has a channel width (that is, a distance between the nail N23 and the nail N24) set to a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The channel width of the second opening portion 2682 is set to be larger than that of the first opening portion 2681, and the channel width of the first opening portion 2681 is smaller than the opening width of the specific winning opening 2065a. Is set to

  The ball draining portion 683 includes a nail N25 disposed at a position closest to the third closing portion 2673 among a plurality of nails constituting the first closing portion 2671 and a plurality of nails constituting the third closing portion 2673. It is a flow path formed between the nail N26 disposed at a position closest to the first closing portion 2671.

  The drainage portion 2683 has a flow path width (interval between the nail N25 and the nail N26) set to a size larger than that of the first opening portion 2681 and the second opening portion 2682. Accordingly, even when a large number of game balls flow from both the first opening portion 2681 and the second opening portion 2682 in a short time, the game balls can smoothly flow down from the ball discharging portion 683 to the downstream side. .

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the variable winning device 2065 is arranged so that the front side of the disc portion 651 is flush with the front side of the game board 2013 when mounted on the game board 2013. .

In the hole portion 13a, a region other than the position where the inflow port 651b is disposed is closed by the disc portion 651 so that the game ball cannot pass therethrough. Accordingly, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 2065a can flow into the inflow port 651, but the gaming ball that has departed from the specific winning port 2065a does not flow into the inflow port 651b, but flows downstream from the ball discharge portion 683. When a rotational driving force is applied to the rotating shaft 651a from the driving shaft Ma of the driving motor M that flows down, the rotating member 2650 rotates, and the ball entry portion 2652 rotates and displaces. At this time, the specific winning opening 2065 is displaced along a circumference centering on the rotation shaft 651a in a state of being directed radially outward of the rotation member 650.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when shifting from the open state (first open state, second open state) to the closed state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 31 (b)) is controlled and a specific prize is awarded. The rotating member 2650 is rotated until the mouth 2065a reaches a position facing the first closing portion 2671.

  In this closed state, the rotating member 2650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 2065a facing the first closing portion 2671, and a ball is inserted between the first opening portion 2681 and the second opening portion 2682 and the inflow port 651b. A connecting wall 2654 configured as a side wall surface of the portion 2652 is provided.

  The shortest distance between the tip of the second connecting wall 2654b and the nail constituting the first closing portion 2671, and the shortest distance between the tip of the third connecting wall 2654c and the nail constituting the first closing portion 2671 The dimension is set smaller than the outer diameter of the sphere. That is, the passing of the game ball between the second connection wall 2654b and the first closing part 2671 and between the third connection wall 2654c and the first closing part 2671 is restricted.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game balls that have passed through the first opening portion 2681 and the second opening portion 2682 from flowing into the inflow port 2651b.

  In the ball entry portion 2652, the tip end portion of the second connection wall 2654b is located in the vicinity of the nail N21, and the distance between the second connection wall 2654b and the second closing portion 2672 (interval with the nail N22) is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Is still at a position where the dimensions are large. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 can smoothly flow down toward the ball discharging portion 2683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 can be prevented from being clogged between the second connecting wall 2654b and the second closing portion 2672, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the first opening portion 2681. Can be prevented.

  The ball entry portion 2652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the second connecting wall 2654b and the third closing portion 2673 is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 can flow smoothly toward the ball discharge portion 2683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 2654 and the third closing portion 2673, so that the ball ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 2682. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the entrance portion 2652 is disposed at a position offset from the center of rotation of the disc portion 651, and the first closing portion 2671, because the tip end portion of the connecting wall 2654 protrudes radially outward from the hole portion 13a. The nail which comprises the 2nd closing part 2672 and the 3rd closing part 2673 is planted in the position spaced apart from the hole 13a to radial direction outward. Accordingly, in the closed state, the space between the connecting wall 2654 and the second closing portion 2672 and the third closing portion 2673, that is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 or the second opening portion 2682 is caused to flow down to the ball discharging portion 2683. Therefore, the flow path can be widened.

  Further, since the drainage portion 2683 has a flow passage width set to be larger than the flow passage widths of the first opening portion 2681 and the second opening portion 2682, the first opening portion 2681 and the second opening portion 2682 Even when a large amount of game balls pass at the same time, the game balls can smoothly flow down from the ball discharge portion 2683 to the downstream side.

  In this way, in the closed state, entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 2065a is restricted, and any game ball passing through the first opening portion 2681 and the second opening portion 2682 enters the specific winning opening 2065a. Without flowing, it flows down from the ball discharging portion 2683 to the downstream side.

  Next, a 1st open state is demonstrated with reference to Fig.33 (a). As shown in FIG. 33A, when shifting to the first open state, the drive motor M is controlled to rotate the rotating member 2650 until the specific winning opening 2065a reaches the position directed to the first open portion 2681. Let

  In the first open state, the rotating member 2650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 2065a facing the first open portion 2681. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 can enter the specific winning opening 2065a and flow into the inflow port 651b.

  Further, the tip end portion of the third connecting wall 2654c is located on the other side in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 2650 (FIG. 33 (a) counterclockwise direction side, left side in FIG. 33 (a)) with respect to the nail N21. The ball entry portion 2652 is stationary in a state where the tip end portion of 2654b is positioned on one side in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 2650 (FIG. 33 (a), clockwise side, right side in FIG. 33 (a)) from the nail N22. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 2065a.

  A connecting wall 2654 configured as a side wall surface of the ball entry portion 2652 is disposed between the second opening portion 2682 and the inflow port 651b. Further, the shortest distance between the front end portion of the second connection wall 2654b and the second closing portion 2672 (the distance between the nails N22 and N23) and the shortest distance between the front end portion of the third connection wall 2654c and the first closing portion 2671. (Distance with nail N21) is set to a size smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the game ball is restricted from passing between the second connecting wall 2654b and the second closing portion 2672 and between the third connecting wall 2654c and the first closing portion 2671.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 from flowing into the inflow port 651b.

In addition, the ball entry portion 2652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the connecting wall 2654 and the third closing portion 2673 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 can flow smoothly toward the ball discharge portion 2683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 2654 and the third closing portion 2673, so that the ball ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 2682. It is possible to prevent the second closed portion because the ball entrance portion 2652 is disposed at a position offset from the rotation center of the disc portion 651 and the tip end portion of the connecting wall 2654 protrudes radially outward from the hole portion 13a. The nail which comprises 2672 and the 3rd closing part 2673 is planted in the position spaced apart from the hole 13a to radial direction outward. Therefore, in the closed state, the space between the connecting wall 2654 and the third closing portion 2673, that is, the flow path for allowing the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 to flow down to the ball discharging portion 2683 can be widened.

  In this way, in the first open state, the game ball passing through the first open portion 2681 can enter the specific winning opening 2065a, while the game ball passing through the second open portion 2682 is removed from the ball discharge portion 2683. It is possible to smoothly flow down to the downstream side.

  Next, a 2nd open state is demonstrated with reference to FIG.33 (b). As shown in FIG. 33 (b), when shifting from the closed state to the second open state, the drive motor M is controlled to rotate the rotating member 2650 until the specific winning opening 2065a reaches the position directed to the second open portion 2682. Rotate.

  In the second open state, the rotating member 2650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 2065a facing the second open portion 2682. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 can enter the specific winning opening 2065a and flow into the inflow port 651b.

  Further, the distal end portion of the third connection wall 2654c is located near the nail N23, and the distal end portion of the second connection wall 2654b is one side in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 2650 from the nail N24 (FIG. 33 (b), the clockwise direction side, In the state located in the lower side of FIG. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 2682 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 2065a.

  In the second open state, the ball entrance portion 2652 is stationary in a state where the inner peripheral surface of the second connection wall 2654b is inclined downward from the distal end portion of the second connection wall 2654b toward the first connection wall 2654a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game ball that has once entered the specific winning opening 2065a from jumping out of the specific winning opening 2065a.

  Note that the second opening portion 2682 has a channel width that is larger than that of the first opening portion 2681. Therefore, in the second open state, it is possible to make the game ball enter the specific winning opening 2065a more efficiently than in the first open state (see FIG. 33A).

  In addition, since the first opening portion 2681 has a flow path width that is smaller than the opening width of the specific winning opening 2065a, it is possible to easily adjust the ease of entering the specific winning opening 2065a. it can. That is, the structure of the variable winning device 2065 can be simplified as compared with the case where the opening width of the specific winning opening 2065a is variably configured.

  In the second open state, a connecting wall 2654 configured as a side wall surface of the ball entry portion 2652 is disposed between the first open portion 2681 and the inflow port 651b. Further, the shortest distance (distance between the nail N23) between the tip portion of the third connecting wall 2654c and the second closing portion 2672 and the shortest distance (nail between the tip portion of the second connecting wall 2654b and the third closing portion 2673). N24) is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the passing of the game ball between the third connection wall 2654c and the second closing part 2672 and between the second connection wall 2654b and the third closing part 2673 is restricted.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 from flowing into the inflow port 651b.

  The ball entry portion 652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the connecting wall 2654 and the first closing portion 2671 is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 can smoothly flow down toward the ball discharging portion 2683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 2654 and the first closing portion 2671, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the first opening portion 2681. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the nail constituting the No. 12671 is provided by the amount of the ball entrance portion 2652 disposed at a position offset from the rotation center of the disc portion 651 and the distal end portion of the connecting wall 2654 projecting radially outward from the hole portion 13a. Is planted at a position spaced radially outward from the hole 13a. Therefore, in the second open state, the interval between the connecting wall 2654 and the first closing portion 2671, that is, the flow path for allowing the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 2681 to flow down to the ball discharging portion 2683 can be widened. .

  Furthermore, since the specific winning opening 2065a is arranged outside the disc portion 651, the opening area of the inflow port 651b can be reduced while increasing the opening width of the specific winning opening 2065a. Thereby, the opening area of the inflow port 651b can be reduced, and the first passage 691 and the second passage 692 for guiding the game balls taken into the inflow port 651b to the outside can be prevented from being enlarged. Therefore, the space occupied by the first passage 691 and the second passage 692 in the arrangement space on the back side of the game board 2013 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, by ensuring a large opening width of the specific winning opening 2065a, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 2065a. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the expectation that it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the specific winning opening 2065a.

  In this way, in the second open state, the game ball passing through the second open portion 682 can enter the specific winning opening 65a, while the game ball passing through the first open portion 681 is removed from the ball discharge portion 683. It is possible to smoothly flow down to the downstream side.

  As described above, the variable prize-winning device 2065 is in an open state in which entry of a game ball into the specific prize opening 2065a is permitted from a closed state (normal state) in which entry of the game ball into the specific prize opening 2065a is restricted. Since the transition to the first open state or the second open state), the game ball is fired to the player according to the displacement mode of the ball entry portion 2652 (according to the direction in which the specific winning opening 2065a is directed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the gaming enjoyed by the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described. In 1st Embodiment, although the inflow port 651b was formed in the disc part 651, and demonstrated the case where the entrance part 651b connected with the disc part 651 and the inflow port 651b displace integrally, 3rd In the embodiment, the inflow port 3651b is formed in the game board 3013, and the ball entry portion 3652 is rotationally displaced with respect to the inflow port 3651b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as each above-mentioned embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the variable winning device 3065 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device 3065 in the third embodiment, FIG. 34 (b) is a back view of the variable winning device 3065, and FIG. 34 (c) is FIG. It is a side view of the variable prize-winning apparatus 3065 seen from the XXXIVc direction of a). In FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 34 (c), the drive motor M is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the variable winning device 3065 includes a ball entry portion 3652 and a drive motor M (see FIG. 4B) that are held rotatably with respect to the game board 3013 (see FIG. 35A). It is mainly equipped with.

  The incoming ball portion 3652 includes a plate-like opposing wall 3653 formed in a drop shape, and a connecting wall 3654 standing on the outer edge portion of the opposing wall 3653.

  The facing wall 3653 is a portion disposed to face the front side of the game board 3013, and a driving shaft Ma (see FIG. 4B) of the driving motor M is connected to the back side of the facing wall 3653. A rotating shaft 3651a is provided upright.

  The connection wall 3654 is a part for restricting the passage of the game ball. The first connection wall 3654a formed in an arc shape and one end side of the first connection wall 3654a (the left end portion in FIG. 34 (b)). A second connection wall 3654b extending linearly from the first connection wall 3654b, and a third connection wall 3654c extending linearly from the other end side (the right end portion in FIG. 34B) of the first connection wall 3654a. The interval between the second connecting wall 3654b and the third connecting wall 3654c decreases as the distance from the first connecting wall 3654a increases.

  Note that a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is provided between both end portions of the connecting wall 3654 (the tip portion of the second connecting wall 3654b and the tip portion of the third connecting wall 3654c).

  An area formed between both end portions of the connecting wall 3654 is configured as a specific winning opening 3065a, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 3065a is surrounded by the opposing wall 3653 and the connecting wall 3654. It is accommodated in the accommodating portion 3655 which is the internal space.

  Further, the rotation shaft 3651a is set such that the distance from the connection wall 3654 is at least larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have entered the housing portion 3655 from the specific winning opening 3065 from being sandwiched between the rotation shaft 3651a and the connecting wall 3654 and causing the game balls to be clogged in the housing portion 3655.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the arrangement relationship between the game board 3013 and the variable winning device 3065 will be described. 35 and 36 are partially enlarged front views of the game board 3013. FIG. FIG. 35A shows the game board 3013 before the variable winning device 3065 is installed, and FIG. 35A shows the game board 3013 with the variable winning device 3065 installed. Yes. In FIG. 35A, illustration of members disposed on the back side of the game board 3013 is omitted to simplify the drawing. 35 (b) shows the game board 3013 in the closed state, FIG. 36 (a) shows the game board 3013 in the first open state, and FIG. 36 (b) shows the game board 3013 in the second open state. Each of them is illustrated, and in order to simplify the drawing and make the description easy to understand, the ball entrance portion 3652 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the game board 3013 includes an insertion hole 3013a through which the rotation shaft 3651a of the ball entry portion 3652 is inserted, and a semicircular inflow port 3651b formed below the insertion hole 3013a. And.

  The inflow port 3651b is formed in an opening size that allows two or more game balls to enter, and a first closing portion 3651, a second closing portion 3672, a third closing portion 3673, which are formed around the inflow port 3651b, The distance between the first opening portion 3681, the second opening portion 3682, and the ball discharging portion 3683 is set to a dimension that is at least larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  On the back side of the game board 3013, a passage (not shown) for transferring the game ball to the outside is provided, and the passage communicates with the inflow port 3651b.

  Since the inflow port 3651b is formed in the game board 3013, the inflow port 3651 with respect to the entire game board 3013 is compared with the case where the inflow port is variably configured or a plurality of inflow ports are provided in the game board 3013. The space occupied by can be reduced.

  In addition, by forming the inflow port 3651b below the insertion hole 3013a, a passage for transferring the game ball to the outside can be disposed below the insertion hole 3013a. In this case, since a space can be secured above the insertion hole 3013a, other members can be arranged in the space. For example, by arranging the drive motor M in this space, the thickness dimension of the pachinko machine 10 (the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 35A) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), in the ball entrance portion 3652, the rotation shaft 3651a is inserted into the insertion hole 3013a and protrudes to the back side of the game board 3013, and the drive motor M is driven on the protruding portion of the rotation shaft 3651a. The shaft Ma (see FIG. 4B) is connected. In this state, the ball entrance portion 3652 is pivotally supported with respect to the game board 3013, and a rotational driving force is applied from the drive motor M to the rotary shaft 3651a, so that the rotating member 3650 is applied to the game board 3013. Rotating displacement.

  When the rotation member 3650 is rotated to shift to the closed state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 4B) is controlled to enter until the specific winning opening 3065a reaches a position directed to the first closing portion 3671. The ball portion 3652 is rotationally displaced.

  In this closed state, the ball-entering portion 3652 is stationary with the specific winning opening 3065a facing the first closing portion 3671, and the first opening portion 3681, the second opening portion 3682, and the inflow port 3651b are inserted. A connecting wall 3654 configured as a side wall surface of the spherical portion 3652 is provided.

  The shortest distance between the tip portion of the second connecting wall 3654b and the tip portion of the third connecting wall 3654c and the nail constituting the first closing portion 3671 is set to a dimension smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. Has been. That is, the game ball is restricted from passing between the second connection wall 3654b and the third connection wall 3654c and the first closing portion 3671.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game balls that have passed through the first opening portion 3681 and the second opening portion 3682 from flowing into the inflow port 3651b.

  In the ball entry portion 3652, the tip end portion of the second connection wall 3654b is located near the nail N31, and the shortest distance between the second connection wall 3654b and the second closing portion (distance to the nail 32) is greater than the outer diameter of the game ball. Still at a position where the Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 can be smoothly caused to flow toward the ball discharging portion 3683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 can be prevented from being clogged between the second connecting wall 3654b and the second closing portion 3672, so that the ball of the game ball is clogged in the first opening portion 3671. Can be prevented.

  The incoming ball portion 3652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the connecting wall 3654 and the third closing portion 3673 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 can flow smoothly toward the ball discharging portion 3683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 3654 and the third closing portion 3673, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 3682. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the closed state, the incoming ball portion 3652 descends from the second connecting wall 3654b toward the first connecting wall 3654a on the outer wall surface of the second connecting wall 3654b facing the first opening portion 3681 in the connecting wall 3654. Stand still in an inclined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 from rolling to the distal end side of the second connection wall 3654b. That is, the game ball can be prevented from staying between the second connecting wall 3654b and the first closing portion 3671 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 3683.

  As described above, in the closed state, the inflow of the game ball to the specific winning opening 3065a is restricted, and any game ball passing through the first opening portion 3681 and the second opening portion 3682 enters the specific winning opening 3065a. Without falling, it flows down from the ball discharging portion 3683 to the downstream side.

  Next, the first open state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 36A, in the case of transition from the closed state to the first open state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 4B) is controlled, and the specific winning opening 3065a is connected to the first open portion 3681. The ball-entering portion 3652 is rotationally displaced until the opposing position is reached.

  In the first open state, the ball-entering portion 3652 is stationary with the specific winning opening 3065a facing the first open portion 3681. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 can be caused to flow into the inflow port 3651b from the specific winning opening 3065a.

  Further, the tip end portion of the third connecting wall 3654c is located on the other side in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 3650 (FIG. 36 (a) counterclockwise direction side, left side in FIG. 36 (a)) relative to the nail N31, The ball entry portion 3652 is stationary with the tip portion of 3654b positioned on one side in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 3650 (FIG. 36 (a), clockwise side, right side in FIG. 36 (a)) with respect to the nail N32. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 3065a.

  A connection wall 3654 configured as a side wall surface of the ball entry portion 3652 is disposed between the second opening portion 3682 and the inflow port 3651b. Furthermore, the shortest distance between the tip portion of the second connection wall 3654b and the second closing portion 3672 (the distance between the nails N32 and N33) and the shortest distance between the tip portion of the third connection wall 3654c and the first closing portion 3671. (Distance with nail N31) is set to a size smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the game ball is restricted from passing between the second connecting wall 3654b and the second closing portion 3672 and between the third connecting wall 3654c and the first closing portion 3671.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 from flowing into the inflow port 3651b.

In addition, the incoming ball portion 3652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the connecting wall 3654 and the third closing portion 3673 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 6382 can be smoothly caused to flow toward the ball discharge portion 3683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 3654 and the third closing portion 3673, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 3682. Further, the ball entrance portion 3652 has the outer wall surface of the second connection wall 3654b facing the second opening portion 3682 in the connection wall 3654 from the tip end portion of the second connection wall 3654b toward the first connection wall 3654a side. It stops in a state where it is tilted downward. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 can flow smoothly toward the ball discharge portion 3683.

  Further, in the first open state, the first connecting wall 3654a is stationary with the first opening portion 3681 facing the first opening portion 3681, so that the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 3065a can be received by the first connecting wall 3654a. it can.

  Further, the first connecting wall 3654a is a surface in which the curvature of the surface facing the first opening portion 3681 faces the upper side of the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 3651b (the arc-shaped portion constituting the lower portion of the inflow port 3651b). In the first open state, the surface facing the first open portion 3681 of the first connecting wall 3654a and the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 3651b (the surface of the inflow port 3651b) facing upward. And the lower end portion) are arranged flush with each other. Thereby, the game ball received by the inner peripheral surface of the 1st connection wall 3654a can be smoothly taken in into the inflow port 3651b.

  In the first open state, it is preferable that the surface of the first connecting wall 3654a that faces the first open portion 3681 is inclined downward from the opposing wall 3653 toward the inflow port 3651b. Thereby, the game ball which landed on the 1st connection wall 3654a can be guide | induced to the inflow port 3651b side by the inclination of the internal peripheral surface of the 1st connection wall 3654a.

  In this way, in the first open state, the periphery of the inflow hole 3651b is surrounded by the connecting wall 3654 except for the first open portion 3681 to which the specific winning opening 3065a is directed, so that it has passed through the first open portion 3681. Only the game balls can enter the specific winning opening 3065a and flow into the inflow port 3651b, and the game balls that have passed through the second opening portion 3682 flow down toward the ball discharge portion 3683 without flowing into the inflow port 3651b. Can be made.

  Therefore, the game ball passing through the second opening portion 3682 can smoothly flow down from the ball discharging portion 3683 to the downstream side while allowing the game ball passing through the first opening portion 3681 to enter the specific winning opening 3065a. Can do.

  Next, the second open state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when shifting to the second open state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 4 (b)) is controlled, and the specific winning opening 3065a is directed to the second open portion 3682. The rotating member 650 is rotated until the position is reached.

  In the second open state, the rotating member 3650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 3065a facing the second open portion 3682. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 can enter the specific winning opening 3065a and flow into the inflow port 3651b.

  Further, the tip end portion of the third connecting wall 3654c is positioned near the nail N33, and the tip end portion of the second connecting wall 3654b is one side in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 3650 with respect to the nail N34 (FIG. 36B, the clockwise direction side, In the state where it is located on the lower side of FIG. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 3065a.

  In the second open state, the ball entrance portion 3652 is stationary in a state where the inner peripheral surface of the second connection wall 3654b is inclined downward from the tip end portion of the second connection wall 3654b toward the first connection wall 3654a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game ball that has once entered the specific winning opening 3065a from jumping out of the specific winning opening 3065a.

  Note that the second opening portion 3682 has a channel width that is larger than that of the first opening portion 3681. Therefore, in the second open state, it is possible to make the game ball enter the specific winning opening 3065a more efficiently than in the first open state (see FIG. 36A).

  In addition, since the first opening portion 3681 has a flow path width that is smaller than the opening width of the specific winning opening 3065a, it is possible to easily adjust the ease of entering the specific winning opening 3065a. it can. That is, the structure of the variable winning device 3065 can be simplified as compared with the case where the opening width of the specific winning opening 3065a is variably configured.

In the second open state, a connecting wall 3654 configured as a side wall surface of the ball entry portion 3652 is disposed between the first open portion 3681 and the inflow port 3651b. Furthermore, the shortest distance (space between the nail N33) between the distal end portion of the third connection wall 3654c and the second closing portion 3672 and the shortest distance (nail between the distal end portion of the second connection wall 3654b and the third closing portion 3673). N34) is set to a size smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the game ball is restricted from passing between the third connecting wall 3654c and the second closing portion 3672 and between the second connecting wall 3654b and the third closing portion 3673.
Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 from flowing into the inflow port 651b.

  The incoming ball portion 3652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the connecting wall 3654 and the first closing portion 3671 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 can be smoothly caused to flow toward the ball discharging portion 3683. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 from being clogged between the connecting wall 3654 and the first closing portion 3671, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the first opening portion 3681. Can be prevented.

  In the second open state, the ball entry portion 3652 moves the outer wall surface of the third connection wall 3654c of the connection wall 3654 facing the first opening portion 3681 from the distal end portion of the third connection wall 3654c to the first connection wall 3654a side. Still in a state of being inclined downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 from rolling to the distal end side of the third connection wall 3654c. That is, the game ball can be prevented from staying between the third connecting wall 3654c and the second closing portion 3672 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 3683.

  Further, since the inner peripheral surface of the second connecting wall 3654b is inclined downward from the second opening portion 3682 toward the inflow port 3651b, the game ball once entered into the housing portion 3655 from the specific winning opening 3065a is a specific prize. Jumping out of the mouth 3065a can be suppressed.

  In the second open state, at least a part of the inner peripheral surface of the first connecting wall 3654a (the surface facing the side where the inflow hole 3651b is disposed) is an arc-shaped portion of the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 3651b. It is almost the same. Thereby, the game ball which landed on the inner peripheral surface of the 1st connection wall 3654a can be smoothly taken in into the inflow port 3651b.

  In the second open state, the second connection wall 3654b is disposed between the flow path from the second open portion 3682 to the inflow port 3651b and the lower portion of the flow path. That is, the second connection wall 3654 functions as a guide path for guiding the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 to the inflow port 3651b.

  Therefore, by widening the interval between the second opening portion 3682 and the inflow port 3651b, in the closed state and the first opening state, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 3682 is moved to the third closing portion 3673 and the connecting wall 3654. It is possible to smoothly flow down toward the ball discharging portion 3683 from between the two. On the other hand, in the second open state, the game ball that has passed through the second open portion 3682 can be guided to the inflow port 3651b by the second connecting wall 3654b.

  In the second open state, the inner peripheral surface of the first connecting wall 3654a (the surface facing the side where the inflow port 3651b is disposed) is from the opposing wall 3653 to the inflow port 3651b side (FIG. 36 (b) from the front side to the back side of the drawing) It is preferable that it is formed so as to be inclined downward. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the second connection wall 3654b and landing on the first connection wall 3654a can be guided to the inlet 3651b side by the inclination of the inner peripheral surface of the first connection wall 3654a.

  In this way, in the second open state, the periphery of the inflow hole 3651b is surrounded by the connecting wall 3654 except for the second open portion 3682 to which the specific winning opening 3065a is directed, and thus has passed through the second open portion 3682. Only the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 3065a and flow into the inflow port 3651b, and the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 3681 can flow down to the ball discharge portion 3683 without flowing into the inflow port to 3651b. Can be made.

  Therefore, in the second open state, the game ball passing through the second open portion 3682 can enter the specific winning opening 3065a, and the game ball passing through the first open portion 3681 is downstream from the ball discharge portion 3683. It is possible to flow down smoothly.

  In addition, the inflow port 3651b is formed in the game board 3013, and even if the inflow port 3651b is displaced, the position of the inflow port 3651b is not displaced. Therefore, the game ball taken into the inflow port 3651b and accommodated in the accommodating portion 655. It is possible to simplify the structure of a passage (not shown) for transferring the machine to the outside of the pachinko machine. As a result, a wide arrangement space other than the passage on the back side of the gaming machine can be secured.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the opening width of the specific winning opening 65a is unchanged has been described. However, in the fourth embodiment, the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a is configured to be variable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as each above-mentioned embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, a schematic configuration of the variable winning device 4065 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is an exploded view of the variable winning device 4065 according to the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the variable winning device 4065 includes a rotating member 4650 that is rotatably supported with respect to the game board 4013 (see FIG. 41A), and the front side of the rotating member 4650 (left side of FIG. 37). , A rotating lever 4656 disposed on the back side of the rotating member 4650 (the right side in FIG. 37), a torsion spring 4657 for applying a biasing force to the rotating lever 4656, and a drive motor. M, and the rotating member 4650, the rotating body 4652, the rotating lever 4656, and the torsion spring 4657 are connected by a connecting bolt 4658.

  The rotating body 4652 and the rotating lever 4656 are connected with the disc portion 4651 sandwiched therebetween, and are rotatably held by the rotating member 4650. Therefore, when the turning lever 4656 is rotated in one direction with respect to the rotating member 4650, the rotating body 4651 rotates in one direction with respect to the rotating member 4650.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the rotating body 4652 and the rotating lever 4656 will be described. FIG. 38A is a front view of the rotating body 4652, FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 4652 along the line XXXVIIIb-XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38A, and FIG. It is a front view of a rotation lever 4656.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), the rotating body 4652 includes a plate-like plate-like portion 4652a whose longitudinal direction is one direction (FIG. 38 (a) vertical direction), and its plate-like shape. A base end portion 4652b formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the portion 4652a (lower side in FIG. 38 (a)) and a shaft portion 4652c projecting on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 38 (b)) of the base end portion 4652b. And a fitting convex portion 4652d formed at the projecting tip portion of the shaft portion 4652c.

  The plate-like portion 4552a is extended from the outer peripheral surface of the base end portion 4652b, and one surface side (the right side in FIG. 38 (a)) of the plate-like portion 4652a is formed in a flat surface shape. In addition, the plate-like portion 4652a has a tip portion on the other surface side (left side in FIG. 38A) formed in an arc shape that follows the shape of the game ball, and is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the base end portion 4652b. Yes.

  A hole through which the connecting bolt 4658 (see FIG. 37) can be inserted is formed in the base end portion 4552b, the shaft portion 4651c, and the fitting convex portion 4652d, and the outer shape of the shaft portion 4652c is formed in a substantially circular shape. The outer shape of the joint convex portion 4652d is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the back side (the right side in FIG. 38B) of the rotating body 4652.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the turning lever 4656 includes a plate-like lever portion 4656a whose longitudinal direction is one direction (FIG. 38 (c) vertical direction), and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lever portion 4656a. A pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c formed on the upper side (FIG. 38 (c)) and a coupling portion 4656b located on the front side (left side in FIG. 38 (c)) of the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c are recessed. Fitting recess 4656d.

  The lever portion 4656a extends from the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c, and both surface sides (the left and right surfaces in FIG. 38 (c)) of the lever portion 4656a are formed into flat surfaces.

  The pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c are arranged at an interval in the front-rear direction (FIG. 38 (c), left-right direction), and a torsion spring 4657 (see FIG. 37) between the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c. Is disposed.

  The fitting concave portion 4656d is a portion into which the fitting convex portion 4652d of the rotating body 4652 is fitted, and the inner peripheral surface of the fitting concave portion 4656d is formed in a substantially square shape corresponding to the outer shape of the fitting convex portion 4852d. Yes.

  The pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c and the fitting recess 4656d are formed with holes through which the coupling bolt 4658 can be inserted, and the coupling bolt 4658 is screwed into the inner peripheral surface of the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c. A connecting bolt 4658 is fixed to the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c.

  Next, the rotating member 4650 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 4650, FIG. 39 (b) is a rear view of the rotating member 4650, and FIG. 39 (c) is from the XXXIXc-XXXIXc direction of FIG. 39 (a). It is the side view of the rotating member 4650 seen.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the rotating member 4650 includes a disk-shaped disk portion 4651, an insertion hole 4651a formed in the axial center portion of the disk portion 4651, and a position offset from the insertion hole 4651a. An inflow port 4651b to be formed, an opposing wall 4653 disposed to face the front side (the lower side in FIG. 39C) of the disc portion 4651, and a connection for connecting the opposing wall 4653 to the disc portion 4651. A wall 4654 and a power transmission portion 4659 fixed to the back surface side (upper side in FIG. 39C) of the disc portion 4651 are provided.

  The disk portion 4651 is provided with a space for disposing the base end portion 4852b of the rotating body 4652 at the peripheral portion of the insertion hole 4651a on the front side thereof, and the connecting wall 4654 from the outer edge portion of the space to the outside. Is extended.

  The facing wall 4653 is disposed at a position corresponding to the inflow port 4651b in the front view of the disc portion 4651, and the facing interval with the disc portion 4651 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  A part of the connecting wall 4654 extends outward from the central portion of the disc portion 4651, and the tip of the extending portion is located at the outer edge portion of the disc portion 4651. Further, the connection wall 4654 is formed in a flat surface on one surface side (a surface facing the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 39A) of the extending portion, and the other surface of the connection wall 4654 as it approaches the disk portion 4651. It is inclined toward the side (FIG. 39A, the surface facing the clockwise direction), and one surface side of the connecting wall 4654 and the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port 4651b are continuously provided in a flush manner.

  The power transmission part 4659 is a part for transmitting the rotational driving force from the drive shaft Ma (see FIG. 37) of the drive motor M to the disk part 4651.

  The power transmission portion 4659 includes a first locking portion 4660 erected on the back surface side of the disc portion 4651 and a motor connecting portion 4661 connected to the first locking portion 4660.

  The first locking portion 4660 is a plate-like portion whose longitudinal direction is one direction (FIG. 39B), and is one end of the first locking portion 4660 at a position offset from the insertion hole 4651a (see FIG. 39 (b) upper end portion) is disposed. The first locking portion 4660 extends from one end thereof toward the outer peripheral side of the disc portion 4651, and the other end (the lower end portion in FIG. 39B) of the first locking portion 4660 is the disc portion 4651. It is located inside the disc portion 4651 with respect to the outer edge portion.

  The motor connection portion 4661 is a cylindrical portion connected to the drive shaft Ma (see FIG. 37) of the motor drive portion M, and extends in the front-rear direction (FIG. 39 (c) vertical direction) from the back side of the disk portion 4651. It is held at one end of the first locking portion 4660 (the front side in FIG. 39 (c)) at a position spaced by a predetermined interval and concentric with the insertion hole 4651a.

  In addition, a plate-like second locking portion 4661 is erected on the back surface side of the disc portion 4651 at a position facing the first locking portion 4660 in the circumferential direction.

  The second locking portion 4661 is a plate-like portion whose longitudinal direction is one direction (FIG. 39 (b) vertical direction), and is second at a predetermined interval from the insertion hole 4651a in one direction. One end (upper side in FIG. 39B) of the locking portion 4661 is disposed. The second locking portion 4661 extends from one end thereof toward the outer peripheral side of the disc portion 4651, and the other end of the second locking portion 4661 is positioned inside the outer edge portion of the disc portion 4651. .

  Here, returning to FIG. 37, the assembly structure of the variable winning device 4065 will be described. In the variable prize winning device 4065, a rotating body 4652 is provided on the front side (left side in FIG. 37) of the disc portion 4651, and a turning lever 4656 is provided on the back side (right side in FIG. 37) of the disc portion 4651.

  In the rotating body 4652, when the shaft portion 4651 c is inserted into the insertion hole 4651 a of the disc portion 4651, the fitting convex portion 4552 d protrudes from the back side of the disc portion 4651. By fitting the fitting concave portion 4656d (see FIG. 38C) of the rotating lever 4656 from the back surface side of the disc portion 4651 to the protruding fitting convex portion 4552d, the plate-like portion 4652a and the lever portion are fitted. The rotating body 4652 and the rotating lever 4656 are connected in a state where the disk portion 4651 is sandwiched between the rotating member 4656a and the rotating lever 4656.

  Note that the outer shape of the fitting convex portion 4652d is formed in a substantially square shape, and the fitting convex portion 4652d is fitted in the fitting concave portion 4656d, so that the rotating body 4652 and the rotating lever 4656 are integrally displaced. Can be made.

  At this time, the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c of the rotating lever 4656 are disposed between the disk portion 4651 and the motor coupling portion 4661, and the holes formed in the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c are insertion holes. 4651a and the motor connecting portion 4661 are arranged concentrically.

  In this state, the cylindrical portion of the torsion spring 4657 is interposed between the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c, and the insertion hole 4651a, the hole formed in the rotating body 4652 and the rotating lever 4656, the torsion spring 4657, The connecting bolt 4658 is inserted through the connecting bolt 4658, and the connecting bolt 4658 is screwed into the pair of coupling portions 4656b and 4656c of the rotating lever 4656, so that the rotating body 4652, the rotating lever 4656, and the torsion spring 4657 are rotatably held. Is done.

  Finally, the drive shaft Ma of the drive motor M is connected to the motor connecting portion 4661. Thus, when the drive motor M is driven, the driving force is applied to the rotating member 4650, and the rotating member 4650 rotates.

  Next, the structure of the variable winning device 4065 will be described with reference to FIG. 40A is a front view of the variable winning device 4065, FIG. 40B is a rear view of the variable winning device 4065, and FIG. 40C is a view from the XXXc direction of FIG. 40A. It is the top view of the variable prize-winning device 4065 seen.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the rotating body 4652 and the rotating lever 4656 are rotatably held by the disk portion 4651. When the rotating lever 4656 rotates with respect to the disk portion 4651, the rotating body 4652 is moved accordingly. It rotates relative to the disk portion 4651.

  The rotating lever 4656 has a distal end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 40 (b)) of the lever portion 4656a that projects outward from the outer edge portion of the disc portion 4651 so that one side of the lever portion 4656a (FIG. 40 (b)). A surface facing the clockwise direction) and one surface side of the first locking portion 4660 (a surface facing the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B) are arranged to face each other in the circumferential direction of the disk portion 4651.

  Further, a torsion spring 4657 is disposed between one surface side of the lever portion 4656a and one surface side of the first locking portion 4660, and one end side of the torsion spring 4657 is brought into contact with the lever portion 4656a of the rotating lever 4656. At the same time, the other end of the torsion spring 4657 is in contact with the first locking portion 4660. Thereby, the rotation lever 4656 is biased in a direction away from the first locking portion 4660 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B).

  The turning lever 4656 is biased by a screw 4657 so that the other surface side (the surface facing the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40 (b)) is locked to the second locking portion 4662.

  Therefore, on the front side of the disc portion 4651, the rotating body 4652 and the connecting wall 4654 facing the one surface side of the rotating body 4652 (the surface facing the clockwise direction in FIG. 40 (a)) are held with a space therebetween. Then, an opening region formed between the distal end portion of the rotating body 4652 and the distal end portion of the connecting wall 4654 directed to the outer peripheral side of the disc portion 4651 is configured as a specific winning opening 4065a.

  The specific winning opening 4065a has an opening width (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 40 (c)) that is at least slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and is configured to allow the game ball to enter. The game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 4065a is accommodated in the accommodating portion 4655 that is an internal space surrounded by the opposing wall 4653, the connecting wall 4654, and the rotating body 4652.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the arrangement relationship between the game board 4013 and the variable winning device 4065 will be described. 41 and 42 are partially enlarged front views of the game board 4013. FIG.
41 and 42, in order to simplify the drawings and make the description easier to understand, the opposing wall 4653 is not shown, the rotating body 4651 and the connecting wall 4654 are viewed in cross section, the inflow port 4651b, the rotating lever 4656, torsion, and the like. A spring 4657, a first locking portion 4660, and a second locking portion 4661 are schematically illustrated. 41 (a), the game board 4013 in the closed state, the game board 4013 in the first open state in FIG. 41 (b), and the transition from the closed state to the second open state in FIG. 42 (a). FIG. 42 (b) shows the game board 4013 in the second open state.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a), the game board 4013 has a plate-like third engagement on the trajectory of the outer edge portion of the hole portion 13a and the tip portion of the lever portion 4656a of the rotating lever 4656 moves. A portion 4013b is erected.

  The third locking portion 4013b has one surface side (a surface facing the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 41 (a)) and one surface side of the first locking portion 4660 (a surface facing the clockwise direction in FIG. 41 (a)). A lever portion 4656a is disposed therebetween, the rotating member 4650 rotates relative to the game board 4013, and the lever portion 4656a is moved to the vicinity of the nail N43 when the distal end portion of the plate-like portion 4651a of the rotating body 4652 is displaced to the vicinity of the nail N43. It is comprised so that it may be latched by the latching | locking part 4013b.

  Here, since the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661 are erected on the disc portion 4651 and the third locking portion 4013b is erected on the game board 4013, the disc portion 4651 is a game. When the relative rotation with respect to the board 4013, the interval in the circumferential direction between the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661 and the third locking portion 4013b changes.

  Therefore, when the interval between the first locking portion 4660 and the third locking portion 4013b in the circumferential direction is wider than the interval between the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661, the lever portion 4656a is 2 is locked to the locking portion 4462. On the other hand, when the circumferential interval between the first locking portion 4660 and the third locking portion 4013b is narrower than the circumferential interval between the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661, the lever The portion 4656a is locked to the third locking portion 4013b.

  Next, the positional relationship between the variable winning device 4065 and the game board 4013 in the closed state will be described. When shifting from the open state (first open state, second open state) to the closed state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 37) is controlled, and the position where the specific winning opening 4065a is directed to the second closed portion 4672 The rotating member 4650 is rotated until it reaches.

  In the closed state, the rotating member 4650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 4065a facing the second closing portion 4672, and the rotation 4652 is between the first opening portion 4681 and the second opening portion 4682 and the inflow port 4651b. Alternatively, a connecting wall 4654 is provided.

  The distal end portion of the plate-like portion 4652a of the rotating body 4652 is located in the vicinity of the nail N42, the distal end portion of the connection wall 4654 is located in the vicinity of the nail N43, and between the plate-like portion 4652a and the connection wall 4654 and the second closing portion 4672. The game ball is restricted from passing through.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game balls that have passed through the first opening portion 4681 and the second opening portion 4682 from flowing into the inflow port 4651b.

  The rotating body 4652 is stationary at a position where the shortest distance (distance to the nail N41) between the distal end portion of the plate-like portion 4651a and the first closing portion 4671 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can be smoothly caused to flow toward the ball discharging portion 4683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can be prevented from being clogged between the plate-like portion 4652a and the first closing portion 4671, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the first opening portion 4681. Can be prevented.

  The connecting wall 4654 is stationary at a position where the distance from the third closing portion 4673 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can smoothly flow down from the ball discharging portion 4683 toward the downstream side. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 4654 and the third closing portion 4673, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 4682. Can be prevented.

  Further, the outer wall surface (the surface facing the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 41 (a)) of the plate-like portion 4652a facing the first opening portion 4681 is lowered from the distal end portion of the plate-like portion 4652a toward the base end portion 4652b. Since it is inclined, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 from rolling to the distal end side of the plate-like portion 4652a. That is, it is possible to avoid the game ball from staying between the plate-shaped portion 4652a and the second closing portion 4672 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 4683.

  Further, the outer peripheral surface of the connecting wall 4654 facing the second opening portion 4682 (the surface facing the clockwise direction in FIG. 41 (a)) descends from the tip end portion of the connecting wall 4654 toward the axial center side of the disk portion 4651. Since it is inclined, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 from rolling to the distal end side of the connecting wall 4654. That is, the game ball can be prevented from staying between the connecting wall 4654 and the second closing portion 4672 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 4683.

  In the closed state, the circumferential interval between the third locking portion 4013c and the first locking portion 4660 is smaller than the circumferential interval between the second locking portion 4661 and the first locking portion 4660. Thus, the lever portion 4656a is locked to the second locking portion 4661.

  Here, in the closed state, the state where the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a is minimized is maintained. Thereby, in the closed state, the interval between the rotating body 4652 and the first closing portion 4671 and the interval between the connecting wall 4654 and the third closing portion 4673 can be secured widely, so the first opening portion 4681 and the second opening portion 4682. The game ball that has passed through can be smoothly flowed down to the ball discharging portion 4683.

  As described above, in the closed state, the inflow of the game ball to the specific winning opening 4065a is restricted, and any game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 and the second opening portion 4682 enters the specific winning opening 4065a. Without flowing down from the ball discharging portion 4683.

  Next, the first open state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when shifting to the first open state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 37) is controlled and rotated until the specific winning opening 4065a reaches the position directed to the second closing portion 4672. The member 4650 is rotated in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 41 (b)).

  In the first open state, the rotating member 4650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 4065a facing the first open portion 4681. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can enter the specific winning opening 4065a and flow into the inflow port 4651b.

  The rotating body 4652 is stationary in a state where the tip end portion of the plate-like body 4652a is located in the vicinity of the first closing portion 4671 (nail N41), and the connecting wall 4654a has the tip end portion of the second closing portion (nails N42, N43). ) Stand still in the vicinity. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 4065a.

  A connecting wall 4654 is disposed between the second opening portion 4682 and the inflow port 4651b, and the connecting wall 4654 has a tip portion spaced from the second closing portion 4672 (nail N42, N43) outside the game ball. It stops at a position where the size is smaller than the diameter. In addition, the rotating body 4652 is stationary at a position where the tip portion of the plate-like body 4652a has a shortest distance from the nail constituting the first closing portion 4671 smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. This restricts the passage of the game ball between the connecting wall 4654 and the second closing portion 4672 and between the plate-like body 4652a and the first closing portion 4671.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 from entering the specific winning opening 4065a and flowing into the Ryukyu port 4651b.

  Further, the connection wall 4654 is stationary at a position where the distance from the third closing portion 4673 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can flow smoothly toward the ball discharging portion 4683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 4654 and the third closing portion 4673, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the second opening portion 4682. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the outer wall surface of the connecting wall 4654 is inclined downward from the tip end portion of the connecting wall 4654 toward the center side of the disc portion 4651, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 is moved to the tip of the connecting wall 4654. Can be prevented from rolling to the side. That is, the game ball can be prevented from staying between the connecting wall 4654 and the second closing portion 4672 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 4683.

  In addition, in the 1st open state, the state which made the opening width | variety of the specific winning opening 4065 the smallest is maintained similarly to a closed state. Thereby, since the space | interval of the 1st closing part 4671 and the 3rd closing part 4673, the rotation body 4652, and the connection wall 4654 can be ensured widely, the game ball which passed the 2nd open part 4682 is directed to the ball discharging part 4683. Can flow smoothly.

  In addition, it is not necessary to adjust the opening width of the specific prize opening 65a when shifting from the closed state to the first open state, so the closed state is closed from the first open state or the first open state. Transition to the state can be performed quickly.

  Here, when shifting from the closed state to the first open state, the rotating member 4650 rotates in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 41 (b)) with respect to the game board 4013, and from the first open state to the closed state. When shifting to, the rotating member 4650 rotates in one direction with respect to the game board 4013 (FIG. 41 (b) clockwise direction). Since the first opening portion 4681 is adjacent to the second closing portion 4672, the rotational movement amount of the rotating member 4650 is reduced when shifting from the closed state to the first open state or from the first open state to the closed state. it can. As a result, the transition from the closed state to the first open state or from the first open state to the closed state can be performed quickly.

  As described above, in the first open state, the game ball that has passed through the first open portion 681 can enter the specific winning opening 4065a, and the game ball that has passed through the second open portion 682 can be removed from the discharge portion 4683. It is possible to smoothly flow down to the downstream side.

  In addition, when shifting from the closed state to the first open state, the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661 are rotationally displaced in the other direction as the rotating member 4650 rotates in the other direction. Thereby, since the 1st latching | locking part 4660 is displaced to the direction spaced apart from the 3rd latching | locking part 4013b, the space | interval of the 1st latching | locking part 4660 and the 3rd latching | locking part 4013b becomes larger than a closed state.

  Therefore, the lever portion 4656a is pressed by the second locking portion 4660 that is displaced in the other direction, and is rotationally displaced in the other direction integrally with the disc portion 4651. As a result, the rotating body 4652 is displaced in the other direction integrally with the connecting wall 4654 while maintaining the facing distance between the plate-like portion 4651a and the connecting wall 4654, and the tip portion of the plate-like portion 4852a is more than the nail N41. It rests in a state where it is located slightly on the left side (FIG. 41 (b) counterclockwise direction side).

  On the other hand, when shifting from the first open state to the closed state, the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661 rotate and move in one direction as the rotating member 4650 rotates in one direction. .

  At this time, the second locking portion 4462 is separated from the first locking portion 4660, while the lever portion 4656a is biased by the torsion spring 4657 in a direction away from the first locking portion 4660. The lever portion 4656a follows the second locking portion 4661 by the force and is displaced in one direction. As a result, the state in which the lever portion 4656a is pressed by the second locking portion 4661 is maintained, and the rotating lever 4656 rotates in one direction integrally with the disc portion 4651.

  As a result, the rotating body 4652 is rotated and displaced in one direction integrally with the connecting wall 4654 while maintaining the facing distance from the connecting wall 4654, and the tip of the rotating body 4652 is positioned near the nail N42. Quiesce.

  As described above, when the transition from the first open state to the closed state is performed, the rotating body 4652 can be rotationally displaced in one direction using the biasing force of the torsion spring 4657. The transition to can be made promptly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific winning opening 4065a when shifting from the first open state to the closed state.

  Next, the second open state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, when shifting to the second open state, the drive motor M (see FIG. 37) is controlled and rotated until the specific winning opening 4065a reaches the position directed to the second open portion 4682. The member 4650 is rotated.

  When shifting from the closed state to the second open state, the rotating member 4650 rotates in one direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 42 (a)) with respect to the game board 4013, and shifts from the second open state to the closed state. When doing so, the rotating member 4650 rotates in the other direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 42A) with respect to the game board 4013. Since the second opening portion 4682 is adjacent to the second closing portion 4671, the rotational movement amount of the rotating member 4650 is reduced when shifting from the closed state to the second open state or from the second open state to the closed state. it can. As a result, the transition from the closed state to the second open state or from the second open state to the closed state can be performed quickly.

  In addition, when shifting from the closed state to the second open state, the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661 are rotationally displaced in one direction with the rotation of the rotating member 4650. Thereby, the 1st latching | locking part 4660 is displaced to the direction which adjoins the 3rd latching | locking part 4013b, and the space | interval of the 1st latching | locking part 4660 and the 3rd latching | locking part 4013b becomes narrower than a closed state.

  When the disc portion 4651 rotates a certain amount in one direction and the tip end portion of the plate-like portion 4652a of the rotating body 4651 is displaced to the vicinity of the nail N43, the position in the circumferential direction of the second locking portion 4661 is the third locking portion. 4013b, and the interval in the circumferential direction between the second locking portion 4661 and the first locking portion 4660 matches the interval between the third locking portion 4013b and the first locking portion 4660 (FIG. )reference).

  When the rotating member 4650 further rotates in one direction from this state and the first locking portion 4660 approaches the third locking portion 4013, the circumferential direction between the second locking portion 4661 and the first locking portion 4660 is increased. The interval is wider than the interval between the third locking portion 4013b and the first locking portion 4660.

  At this time, since the lever portion 4656a is locked to the third locking portion 4013b, further displacement of the rotating lever 4656 is restricted, and the circumferential interval between the first locking portion 4659 and the lever portion 4656a is increased. Get smaller.

  As a result, on the front side of the rotating member 4650, the connecting wall 4654 is rotationally displaced in one direction while the rotation of the rotating body 4652 is restricted. As a result, the opening distance of the specific winning opening 4065a is gradually widened by increasing the facing distance between the rotating body 4652 and the connecting wall 4654, and the leading end of the connecting wall 4654 is slightly below the nail N44 (FIG. 42 (b ) The rotating member 4650 stops in a state of being displaced to the lower side.

  In this way, the rotating member 4650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 4065a directed to the second opening portion 4682, so that the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 flows into the inflow port 4651b from the specific winning opening 4065a. Can be made.

  On the other hand, when shifting from the second open state to the closed state, the first locking portion 4660 and the second locking portion 4661 are rotationally displaced in the other direction side with the rotation of the rotating member 4650 in the other direction side. .

  At this time, the 1st latching | locking part 4660 is displaced to the direction spaced apart from the 3rd latching | locking part 4013b, and the space | interval of the 1st latching | locking part 4660 and the 3rd latching | locking part 4013b spreads.

  Here, in the initial stage of transition from the second open state to the closed state, the interval between the third locking portion 4013b and the first locking portion 4660 is the interval between the second locking portion 4661 and the first locking portion 4660. Narrower than. Therefore, even when the rotation member 4650 starts rotating, the lever portion 4656a is urged in the direction away from the first locking portion 4660 by the urging force of the torsion spring 4657 and pressed by the third locking portion 4013b. Therefore, the rotation lever 4656 does not rotate.

  As a result, on the front side of the rotating member 4650, the connecting wall 4654 is rotationally displaced in the other direction side, whereas the rotating body 4652 is stationary without being rotationally displaced, so that the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a is gradually increased. Becomes smaller.

  Thereafter, the rotation member 4650 rotates by a certain amount, and the circumferential interval between the second locking portion 4462 and the first locking portion 4660 is the circumferential interval between the third locking portion 4013b and the first locking portion 4660. When it becomes narrower, the lever portion 4656a is pressed by the second locking portion 4661 and is separated from the third locking portion 4013b, and the rotating lever 4656 is rotationally displaced integrally with the rotating member 4650 in the other direction.

  Thus, on the front side of the rotating member 4650, when the connecting wall 4654 comes close to the rotating body 4652 until the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a is the smallest, the facing distance between the rotating body 4652 and the connecting wall 4654 is maintained. In this state, the rotating body 4652 and the connecting wall 4654 are integrally rotated and displaced in the other direction, and the distal end portion of the rotating body 4652 is stationary in a state where it is located near the nail N42.

  As described above, when the transition from the second open state to the closed state is performed, the rotating body 4652 can be rotationally displaced in the other direction by using the biasing force of the torsion spring 4657. The transition to the state can be performed promptly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific winning opening 4065a when shifting from the second open state to the closed state.

  Further, the variable prize winning device 4065 has the connecting wall 4654 fixed to the disc portion 4651 and the rotating body 4652 rotatably supported by the disc portion 4651 so that the rotating body 4652 is rotationally displaced with respect to the disc portion 4651. By doing so, the rotating body 4652 and the connecting wall 4654 are brought close to or away from each other, and the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a is changed. Therefore, the configuration of the rotating member 4650 can be simplified as compared with the case where both the rotating body 4651 and the connecting wall 4654 are configured to be rotatable relative to the disc portion 4651.

  Further, in the variable winning device 4065, the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a can be configured to be variable by applying a driving force to the rotating member 4650 by the driving motor M and applying a biasing force by the torsion spring 4657. Therefore, as compared with the case where a motor separate from the drive motor M is provided as a drive source for changing the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a, an increase in the drive source (motor) can be avoided, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. Reduction can be achieved, and control of the variable winning device 4065 can be simplified.

  In the second open state, the rotary member 4650 is stationary with the specific winning opening 4065a facing the second opening portion 4682, and therefore the specific winning opening 4065a is opened toward the second opening portion 4682. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can enter the accommodation portion 4655 from the specific winning opening 4065a.

  In the second open state, the rotating body 4652 and the connecting wall 4654 are stationary with the specific prize opening 4065a facing the second open portion 4682. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can enter the specific winning opening 4065a and flow into the inflow port 4651b.

  In addition, the rotating body 4652 is stationary in a state where the tip end portion of the plate-like body 4652a is positioned in the vicinity of the second closing portion 4672 (nail N43), and the connecting wall 4654a has a tip end portion of the third closing portion (nail N443). ) Stand still in the vicinity. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 4065a.

  A rotating body 4652 is disposed between the first opening portion 4681 and the inflow port 4651b, and the rotating body 4652 is such that the tip of the plate-like body 4652a is spaced from the second closing portion 4672 (nails N42, N43). Stops at a position that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the connecting wall 4654 is stationary at a position where the tip portion thereof has a minimum distance from the outer diameter of the game ball with the nail constituting the third closing portion 4673 (nail N44). This restricts the game ball from passing between the plate-like body 4552a and the second closing portion 4672 and between the connecting wall 4654 and the third closing portion 4673.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 from entering the specific winning opening 4065a and flowing into the Ryukyu port 4651b.

  Further, the rotating body 4652 is stationary at a position where the distance between the plate-like body 4652a and the first closing portion 4671 is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can be smoothly caused to flow toward the ball discharging portion 4683. That is, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can be prevented from being clogged between the connecting wall 4654 and the first closing portion 4671, so that the ball of the game ball is generated in the first opening portion 4681. Can be prevented.

  Further, the rotating body 4652 is stationary in a state where the outer wall surface of the plate-like body 4652a facing the first opening portion 4681 is inclined downward from the distal end portion toward the base end portion 4652b side. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through from rolling toward the front end side of the plate-like portion 4652a. That is, it is possible to avoid the game ball from staying between the plate-shaped portion 4652a and the second closing portion 4672 without flowing down toward the ball discharging portion 4683.

  As described above, in the second open state, the game ball that has passed through the second open portion 4682 can enter the specific winning opening 4065a, and the game ball that has passed through the first open portion 4681 can be directed to the ball discharge portion 4683. It can flow smoothly.

  The second opening portion 4682 has a channel width wider than that of the first opening portion 4681. In the second opening state, the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a is wider than that in the first opening state. It can be made easier to efficiently flow toward the inlet 4651 side than in the first open state.

  In addition, since the second closing portion 4672 and the second opening portion 4682 are adjacent to each other, the specific winning of the game ball is determined when shifting from the closed state to the second opened state or from the second opened state to the closed state. The approach to the mouth 65a can be suppressed.

  As described above, the variable winning device 4065 can change the ease of entering the specific winning opening 4065a by changing the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a. Therefore, diversification of games can be achieved.

In addition, since the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a can be changed using the drive motor M that rotates the rotating member 4650 and the torsion spring 4657, a separate drive source is used to change the opening width of the specific winning opening 4065a. Compared to the above, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation width of the specific winning opening 4065a is adjusted by using both the drive motor M and the torsion spring 4657 at the same time in the rotating member 4650, but only the urging force of the torsion spring 4657 is used. May be.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the case where both the rotating body 4652 and the connecting wall 4654 are rotationally displaced when shifting from the closed state to the first open state and the second open state has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, When shifting from the closed state to the first open state or the second open state, either one of the eleventh rotating body 5562 or the second rotating body 5654 is rotationally displaced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as each above-mentioned embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  43 and 44 are partially enlarged front views of the game board 4013 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 43A shows the game board 4013 in the closed state, and FIG. 43B shows the first game board 4013. FIG. 44 shows the game board 4013 in the open state, and FIG. 44 shows the game board 4013 in the second open state. 43 and 44, the first rotating body 5562 and the second rotating body 5654 are viewed in cross section in order to simplify the drawings and make the description easy to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, the rotating member 5650 includes a fan-shaped first fan-shaped member 5651c, a fan-shaped second fan-shaped member 5651d arranged concentrically with the first member 5651c, and a first The 1st rotation body 5552 standingly arranged by the circumferential direction one end side (FIG. 43 (a) clockwise direction edge part) of the sector-shaped member 5651c, and the circumferential direction other end side (FIG. 43 (a)) of the 2nd sector-shaped member 5651d. And a second rotating body 5654 which is erected on the counterclockwise direction side end).

  The first sector member 5651c and the second sector member 5651d are rotatably held, and the first sector member 5651c and the second sector member 5651d are connected to separate drive sources (not shown), respectively. By separately driving the drive source, the first sector member 5651c and the second sector member 5651d can be rotationally displaced independently.

  The rotating member 5650 has one surface side of the first rotating body 5562 (a surface facing in the clockwise direction in FIG. 43A) and the other surface side of the second rotating body 5654 (a surface facing in the clockwise direction in FIG. 43A). Are arranged opposite to each other. An opening region formed between the distal end portion of the first rotating body 5562 and the distal end portion of the second rotating body 5654 and directed radially outward of the rotating member 5650 is configured as a specific winning opening 5065a, and the specific winning opening The game ball that has entered the ball 5065a flows into an inflow port 5651b formed between one surface side of the first rotation body 5562 and the other surface side of the second rotation body 5654, and is collected on the back surface side of the game board 4013. The

  In the closed state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the specific winning opening 5065a is directed to the second closing portion 4672, and the first member 5651c is stopped when the tip of the first rotating body 5652 reaches the vicinity of the nail N42. The second member 5651d is stationary at the position reaching the vicinity of the tip end nail N43 of the second rotating body 5654. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the game balls that have passed through the first opening portion 4681 and the second opening portion 5682 from entering the specific winning opening 5065a and flowing into the inflow port 5651b.

  In the closed state, a part of the first member 5651c and a part of the second member 5651d are overlapped. As a result, most of the hole portion 13a except the inflow port 5651b is closed by the first member 5651c and the second member 5651d.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), in the case of transition from the closed state to the first open state, the first member 5651c is rotationally displaced to separate the first rotating body 5562 from the second rotating body 564. The opening width of the specific winning opening 5065a is increased. The first member 5651c stops when the tip of the first rotating body 5651 reaches the vicinity of the nail N41. As a result, the specific winning opening 5651a is directed toward the first opening portion 4681 to be opened, and the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can be made to flow from the specific winning opening 5065a to the inflow port 5651b.

  At this time, the second member 5651d is stationary at the same position as in the closed state, but is stationary at the position where the tip end portion of the second rotating body 5652 has reached the vicinity of the nail N43, and therefore, the second opening portion 4682 is opened. It can be regulated that the game ball that has passed enters the specific winning opening 5065a and flows into the inflow port 5651b.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), in the case of transition from the closed state to the first open state, the first member 5651c is rotationally displaced to separate the first rotating body 5562 from the second rotating body 564. The opening width of the specific winning opening 5065a is increased. The first member 5651c stops when the tip of the first rotating body 5651 reaches the vicinity of the nail N41. As a result, the specific winning opening 5651a is directed toward the first opening portion 4681 to be opened, and the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 4681 can be made to flow from the specific winning opening 5065a to the inflow port 5651b.

  At this time, the second member 5651d is stationary at the same position as the closed state, but the second rotating body 5654 is stationary at the position where the tip of the second rotating body 5654 reaches the vicinity of the nail N43. It can be regulated that the game ball that has passed enters the specific winning opening 5065a and flows into the inflow port 5651b.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when shifting from the closed state to the second opened state, the second member 5651d is rotationally displaced to separate the second rotating body 5654 from the first rotating body 562, thereby allowing the specific prize opening. The opening width of 5065a is increased. The second member 5651d stops when the tip end portion of the second rotating body 5562 reaches the vicinity of the nail N44. As a result, the specific winning opening 5651a is directed to the second opening portion 4682 and is opened, and the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion 4682 can be allowed to flow from the specific winning opening 5065a to the inflow port 5651b.

  At this time, the first member 5651b is stationary at the same position as the closed state, but is stationary at the position where the distal end portion of the first rotating body 5562 has reached the vicinity of the nail N43, so the first opening portion 4681 is It can be regulated that the game ball that has passed enters the specific winning opening 5065a and flows into the inflow port 5651b.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, by rotating and displacing one of the first member 5651c and the second member 5651d, the specific winning port 5065a is directed toward the first opening portion 4681 or the second opening portion 4682. It can be opened. Therefore, the structure of the variable winning device 5065 can be simplified.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48. In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotation member 650 is constant. In the sixth embodiment, a case where the rotation speed of the rotation member 650 is changed according to the jackpot type will be described. In addition, in the same structure as each above-mentioned embodiment, the illustration and description are abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 45, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first modification will be described. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the main controller of the first modification. Note that differences from the first embodiment will be described, and detailed description of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45, a speed counter 203m is added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification as compared with the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The speed counter 203m is a counter for storing the rotational speed level of the rotating member 650, and a rotational speed level corresponding to the jackpot type is set. The speed counter 203m is set with a speed level value corresponding to the jackpot type, and when the speed counter 203m becomes 0, the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l are incremented or decremented by one. The larger the speed level value set in the speed counter 203m, the more time it takes for the value of the speed counter 203m to become 0. Therefore, the variable winning device 65 is released from the closed state to the open state (first opening). State or the second open state), or the time required to shift from the open state to the closed state becomes longer.

Next, the special symbol jackpot random number table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 46A, in the first modification, eight types from “big hit E” to “big hit L” are set as the big hit types, and “big hit E” is set by the first hit type counter C2. To determine one of “Large Bonus L”. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  In the rotation amount storage area 203g (see FIG. 45B), when a special symbol lottery is executed by the main controller 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the rotation of the drive motor M according to the big hit type is determined. The value of the dynamic data is set.

  That is, when the big hit type is “big hit E”, “big hit F”, “big hit I” or “big hit J”, “2” is stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g. This is because the rotating member 650 is rotated 40 degrees from the origin position in one direction (FIG. 6 (a) clockwise direction) from the closed state shown in FIG. 7 (a) to the first opened state shown in FIG. 6 (b). It means to move to.

  On the other hand, when the big hit type is “big hit G”, “big hit H”, “big hit K” or “big hit L”, “−13” is stored in the rotation amount storage area 203g. This is because the rotating member 650 is rotated 260 degrees from the origin position in the other direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 6 (a)), and the second opened state shown in FIG. 7 (a) from the closed state shown in FIG. 6 (a). Means transition to the state.

  When the jackpot type is “Big Jack E”, “Big Jack G”, “Big Jack I” or “Big Jack K”, “1” is stored in the speed counter 203m as the value of the speed level. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “big hit F”, “big hit H”, “big hit J”, or “big hit L”, “2” is stored in the speed counter 203m as the value of the speed level.

  When the speed level value is “1”, the rotation speed of the drive motor M is higher than when the speed level value is “2”. That is, when the speed level value is “1”, compared with the case where the speed level value is “2”, the closed state is changed to the open state (the first open state or the second open state), or The time required to complete the transition from the open state to the closed state is shortened. As a result, in the case where the speed level value is “2”, the specific prize opening is during the movement of the rotating member 650 during the transition from the open state to the closed state, compared to the case where the speed level value is “1”. The time during which the game ball can enter 65a becomes longer. Thereby, the game nature which a player enjoys can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot control process 2 (S1020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main storage device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1020). This jackpot control process (S1020) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 24), and starts to switch the variable winning device 65 from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state. And is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004) in the above embodiment.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (S1020), first, it is determined whether or not it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is switched from OFF to ON (S1101).

  In the process of S1101, when the jackpot flag is switched from off to on (S1101: Yes), the special symbol lottery result performed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) becomes a jackpot, and a new jackpot game Therefore, the value (16 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the type of jackpot of the special symbol is set in the round counter 203i (S1102), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not switched from OFF to ON in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1103).

  In the processing of S1103, if the jackpot flag is not on (S1103: No), it is determined that the special symbol is not being jackpoted, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is on in the processing of S1103 (S1103: Yes), then it is time to start opening the specific winning opening 65a (the second and subsequent new rounds are started). It is determined whether or not it is a timing for starting the transition from the closed state to the open state of the variable winning device 65 (S1104).

  In the process of S1104, if it is the timing for starting the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (S1104: Yes), the release flag 203j is set to ON (S1105). After the release flag 203j is set to ON by the processing of S1105, a round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106), then 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter 203i, and the special symbol jackpot Based on the random number table 202d, the speed level data in the first round among the rotational speed levels of the rotating member 650 corresponding to the jackpot type (the jackpot type is “jackpot M”, “jackpot N”, “jackpot P”, “jackpot Q” In this case, “2” is set in the speed counter 203m, and “5” is set in the case where the jackpot type is “big hit O” or “big hit R”, and the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1104, if it is not the timing for starting the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (S1104: No), then it is the timing for closing the variable winning device 65 (from the open state of the variable winning device 65) It is determined whether it is time to start the transition to the closed state (S1108).

  In the process of S1108, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a are not satisfied (S1108: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the release flag 203j is set to off (S1109), and then the closing flag is set to on ( S1110), the process is terminated.

  Thus, based on the fact that the jackpot flag is set to ON, the drive motor M is controlled according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the control of the drive motor M can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the electric accessory operation process 2 (S1030) executed by the MPU 201 in the main storage device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory act 2 (S1030). The electric accessory act 2 (S1030) is a process executed after the jackpot control process 2S1020 (see FIG. 47) in the main process (see FIG. 24). This is a process for driving M and rotating the rotating member 650. In addition, this electric agent operation | work process 2 (S1030) is performed instead of the electric agent operation | movement process (S1005) in the said embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the electric accessory operation process (S1030), it is first determined whether or not the release flag 203j is on (S1151).

  In the processing of S1151, if the release flag 203j is on (S1151: Yes), the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 is set in the rotation position storage area 203h (S1152).

  When the process of S1152 ends, the rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h in the process of S1152 matches the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g. It is determined whether or not (S1153).

  In the processing of S1153, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h matches the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g (S1053: Yes), it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is in the open state (the transition to the first open state or the second open state has been completed), and thus this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1122, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h does not match the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g ( S1124: No), 1 is subtracted from the speed counter 203m (S1154), and then it is determined whether or not the speed level set in the speed counter 203m is “0” (S1155).

  If the value of the speed level set in the speed counter 203m is not “0” in the process of S1155 (S1155: No), the process proceeds to other processes (S1134). On the other hand, if the value of the speed level set in the speed counter 203m is “0” in the processing of S1155 (S1155: Yes), then the speed level value corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the speed counter 203m. Specifically, a speed level value corresponding to the number of rounds set in the round number commander is set in the speed counter 203m based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202d (S1156).

  When the processing of S1156 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a negative value (S1157).

  In the process of S1157, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is not a negative value (S1124: No), the variable winning device 65 shifts from the closed state to the first open state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in one direction (FIG. 7 (a) clockwise).

  Therefore, in order to drive the drive motor M and rotate the rotating member 650 in one direction, 1 is added to the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l (S1158), and the process proceeds to other processes (S1134).

  On the other hand, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a negative value in the processing of S1157 (S1157: Yes), the variable winning device 65 is changed from the closed state to the second open state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7A) during the transition.

  Therefore, 1 is subtracted from the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l in order to drive the drive motor M and rotate the rotating member 650 in the other direction (S1159), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  If the release flag 203j is not on in the processing of S1151 (S1151: No), it is then determined whether or not the closing flag is on (S1160).

  If the closing flag is not on in the process of S1160 (S1160: No), it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (the transition to the closed state has been completed), so the process proceeds to S1134. Transition.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1160, if the closing flag is on (S1160: Yes), it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is in the process of shifting from the first open state or the second open state to the closed state. Therefore, the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 is set in the rotation position storage area 203h (S1161).

  When the processing of S1161 ends, it is determined whether or not the rotational position of the rotating member 650 set in the rotational position storage area 203h in the processing of S1161 is the origin position (S1162).

  In the process of S1162, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h is the origin position (S1162: Yes), the variable winning device 65 is in the open state (first open state or second open state). Since it is determined that the transition from the (state) to the closed state has been completed, the closing flag is set to OFF (S1163), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1162, if the current rotation position of the rotation member 650 set in the rotation position storage area 203h is not the origin position (S1162: No), the variable winning device 65 is in the first open state or the second open state. Therefore, the speed counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S1164), and then it is determined whether or not the speed level set in the speed counter 203m is “0”. (S1165).

  In the process of S1165, if the value of the speed level set in the speed counter 203m is not “0” (S1165: No), the process proceeds to S1134.

  On the other hand, if the value of the speed level set in the speed counter 203m is “0” in the processing of S1165 (S1165: Yes), the speed level value corresponding to the number of rounds is then set in the speed counter 203m ( S1166).

  When the processing of S1166 ends, it is next determined whether or not the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a negative value (S1167).

  In the process of S1167, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a negative value (S1167: Yes), the variable winning device 65 shifts from the first open state to the closed state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in the other direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 7A) in the middle. Therefore, 1 is subtracted from the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l in order to drive the drive motor M and rotate the rotating member 650 in the other direction (S1168), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1167, if the rotation amount data of the drive motor M set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is not a negative value (S1167: No), the variable winning device 65 is changed from the second open state to the closed state. It is determined that the rotation member 650 is being rotated in one direction (FIG. 7A, the clockwise direction) during the transition. Therefore, in order to drive the drive motor M and rotate the rotating member 650 in one direction, 1 is added to the step counter 203k and the excitation counter 203l (S1169), and the process proceeds to S1134.

  As described above, in the first modified example, the rotational speed of the rotating member 650 when the transition from the open state (the first open state or the second open state) to the closed state is performed according to the type of jackpot Displacement speed) is set to a different speed. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the rotation speed of the rotating member 650 is set slower, the game to the specific winning opening 65a in the process of shifting from the open state to the closed state than in the jackpot type in which the rotation speed of the rotating member 650 is set higher. The period during which the ball can enter becomes longer.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the flow path width of the second opening portion 682 is set to approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball, the clockwise direction in the front view of the game board 13 from the second open state ( When the specific winning opening 65a is displaced in the clockwise direction of FIG. 6 (a), a position (the specific winning opening 65a is stationary in the second open state) for a certain period after the start of the displacement of the specific winning opening 65a ( The second opening 682 is moved from the open position) until the distance between the tip of the third connecting wall 654c and the nail N4 is displaced to a position where the outer diameter of the game ball is equal to the outer diameter of the game ball. It is possible to allow the passed game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Therefore, the slower the rotation speed of the rotating member 650, the more game balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In this way, the displacement speed of the specific winning opening 65a is variably configured so that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the process of shifting from the open state to the closed state can be adjusted. In the process of displacing the specific winning opening 65a from the closed position to the closed state, the player can enjoy the expectation that the game ball will enter the specific winning opening 65a according to the displacement speed of the specific winning opening 65a. Gameability can be improved.

  The rotational speed of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the closed state to the open state and the rotational speed of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the open state to the closed state may be set to the same speed or different speeds. May be set.

  By making the rotational speed of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the closed state to the open state and the rotating speed of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the open state to the closed state the same speed, the rotational speed of the rotating member 650 is related. Control can be simplified.

Further, for example, as a closing condition in S1108 (see FIG. 47), the transition from the open state to the closed state is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the transition from the closed state to the open state. If you have
On the other hand, diversification of the game is achieved by setting the rotational speed of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the closed state to the open state and the rotational speed of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the open state to the closed state are different. be able to.

  For example, as the closing condition in S1108 (see FIG. 47), the transition from the open state to the closed state is started when the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a (winning number) reaches a predetermined number. In the case where it is set, the rotation speed of the rotation member 650 when shifting from the open state to the closed state is slower (faster) than the rotation speed of the rotation member 650 when shifting from the normal state to the open state, It is possible to increase (decrease) the expectation for increasing the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a for each round.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, on the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 650 when shifting from the closed state to the open state is the same regardless of the type of jackpot, Next, a case where the rotation angle of the rotating member 650 is changed will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202e in the main controller of the seventh embodiment. In addition, in the same structure as each above-mentioned embodiment, the illustration and description are abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the seventh embodiment, six types from “big hit M” to “big hit R” are set as the big hit types, and from “big hit M” to “ One of the jackpot R's is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  In each jackpot type, one jackpot is composed of eight rounds, and when the jackpot type is “jackpot M” or “jackpot P”, the value of the round counter 203i is “1-3, 5, In the case of “7, 8”, “2” is set as the value of the rotation amount data in the rotation amount storage area 203g. This is because the rotating member 650 is rotated 40 degrees from the origin position in one direction (FIG. 6 (a) clockwise direction) from the closed state shown in FIG. 6 (a) to the first opened state shown in FIG. 6 (b). It means to move to. When the value of the round counter 203i is “4, 6”, “5” is set as the value of the rotation amount data in the rotation amount storage area 203g. This means that the rotation member 650 is rotated 100 degrees in one direction from the origin position, and shifts from the closed state shown in FIG. 6A to the first open state shown in FIG. 6B.

  When the jackpot type is “big hit N” or “big hit Q”, “2” is set as the value of the rotation amount data in the rotation amount storage area 203g regardless of the value of the round counter 203i. Is “big hit O” or “big hit R”, regardless of the value of the round counter 203i, “5” is set as the value of the rotation amount data in the rotation amount storage area 203g.

  In this way, by changing the direction of the specific winning opening 65a in accordance with the jackpot type, it is possible to improve the gameability that the player enjoys.

  In the present embodiment, the value set in the rotation amount storage area 203g is a positive value regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, whether the transition from the closed state to the first open state or the transition to the second open state, the specific winning port 65a is rotationally displaced in the clockwise direction in the front view of the game board 13. Therefore, the player is stationary in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is directed to the first opening part 681 (see FIG. 6B) or directed to the second opening part 682 (see FIG. 7A). Since it is difficult to determine in advance whether or not the player is stationary, the gameability enjoyed by the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the second modification, one jackpot (privilege game) is composed of eight rounds (small bonus game), and depending on the jackpot type, the displacement speed of the specific winning opening 65a (the rotation of the rotating member 650) for each round. Speed) can be changed. Thereby, since diversification of games can be achieved, the gameability enjoyed by the player can be improved.

  Further, the displacement speed of the specific winning opening 65a for each round is determined in advance for each jackpot type by the jackpot type selection table 202e. Therefore, the control of the specific winning opening 65a can be simplified as compared with the case where a lottery for determining the displacement speed is performed each time each round is started.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be inferred.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration in one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of the other embodiments.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the variable winning devices 65, 2065, 3065, 4065, and 5065 are disposed below the first start port 64 in the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, it may be arranged at other positions in the game area.

  In each of the above embodiments, the first closing portions 671, 2671, 3671, 4671, the second closing portions 672, 2672, 3672, 4672, and the third closing portions 673, 2673 are the closing portions that restrict the passage of the game ball. , 3673, 4673, and the first opening portions 681, 2681, 3681, 4681 and the second opening portions 682, 2682, 3682, 4682 as the opening portions that allow the passage of the game ball. In addition, the case where the opening portion is disposed on the upstream side of the variable winning devices 65, 2065, 3065, 4065, and 5065 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of closing portions is two or less or four. The number of open portions may be one or three or more. Moreover, you may be comprised so that inflow may be performed freely abbreviate | omitting a closing part.

  In each of the above embodiments, the first closing portions 671, 2671, 3671, 4671, the second closing portions 672, 2672, 3672, 4672 and the third closing portions 673, 2673, 3673, 4673 are constituted by a plurality of nails. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the first closing portions 671, 2671, 3671, 4671, the second closing portions 672, 2672, 3672, 4672, and the third closing portions 673, 2673, 3673. , 4673 may be composed of another member, for example, a plate-like member standing on the game board.

  Further, the first closing part 671, 2671, 3671, 4671, the second closing part 672, 2672, 3672, 4672 and the third closing part 673, 2673, 3673, 4673 are constituted by a cover body, and the cover body is a game board. 13, 1313, 3013, 4013, the first closing part 671, 2671, 3671, 4671, the second closing part 672, 2672, 3672, 4672 and the third closing part 673, 2673, 3673, 4673 are provided. The game board or the cover body may be configured to be able to appear and disappear. Further, the first closing portions 671, 2671, 3671, 4671, the second closing portions 672, 2672, 3672, 4672 and the third closing portions 673, 2673, 3673, 4673 may be configured as one unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the second opening portions 682, 2682, 3682, and 4682 have an opening width larger than that of the first opening portions 681, 2681, 3681, and 4681 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The opening widths of the first opening portion and the second opening portion may be the same size, and the opening width of the first opening portion may be set to be larger than the opening width of the second opening portion.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a in the first open state and when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 2065a, 3065a, in the second open state. Although the case where the number of prize balls to be paid out is different depending on the case where the balls enter 4065a and 5065a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be the same.

  In each of the above embodiments, the first opening portions 681, 2681, 3681, and 4681 are formed above the variable winning devices 65, 2065, 3065, 4065, and 5065, and the second opening portions 682, 2682, 3682, and 4682 are variable. The case where it is formed on the right side of the winning devices 65, 2065, 3065, 4065, 5065 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the first opening portion or the second opening portion is at least the inflow ports 651b, 3651b, It may be formed upstream of 4651b and 5651b.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the specific winning opening 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a from any one of the first opening portions 681, 2681, 3681, 4681 or the second opening portions 682, 2682, 3682, 4682 In a state where a game ball can be entered, the specific winning openings 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a from the other one of the first opening parts 681, 681, 3681, 4681 or the second opening parts 681, 2682, 3682, 4682, Although the case where entry of a game ball into 5065a is restricted has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the first opening portions 681, 2681, 3681, 4681 and the second opening portions 682, 2682, 3682, 4682 are not necessarily limited thereto. Specific winning openings 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a from both Ball entrance of game ball to the 5065a may be configured to be able to.

  In the first and second embodiments, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow hole 651b in the first open state is taken into the first passage 691, and the game ball that has flowed into the inflow hole 651b in the second open state is the second passage. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game ball that flows into the inflow hole 651b in the first open state and the game ball that flows into the inflow hole 651b in the second open state are common. You may comprise so that it may be taken in into a channel | path.

  In the first to third embodiments, the case where the first closing portions 671, 2671, and 3671 extend to the lower side than the rotation shafts 651a and 3651a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The first closing portion is configured to be able to restrict the entry of the game ball into the specific winning ports 65a, 2065a, 3065a in a state where at least the specific winning ports 65a, 2065a, 3065a are directed to the first closing portion. It only has to be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the specific winning openings 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a are configured to be displaced on a predetermined circumference by the application of the driving force by the driving motor M has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific winning opening may be configured to slide by applying a driving force. For example, a closing part (first closing part, second closing part, etc.) and an opening part (first opening part, second opening part, etc.) are formed upstream of the region where the specific winning opening is displaced to the specific winning opening. When restricting the entry of the game ball, the specific prize opening is arranged below the closing part, and when allowing the game ball to enter the specific prize opening, the special prize opening is arranged below the opening part. In this way, the ball entry portion or the like may be displaced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the ball-rejecting portions 683, 2683, 3683, and 4683 are formed between the first closing portions 671, 2671, 3671, and 4671 and the third closing portions 673, 2673, 3673, and 4673, and the specific winning opening 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a has been described as a case where the game ball is allowed to flow downstream from the ball discharging portion 683, 2683, 3683, 4683, but is not necessarily limited to this, instead of the ball discharging portion An outlet may be provided.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the specific winning ports 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a are directed to the first closing portion 671, 2671, 3671 or the second closing portion 4672, so that the specific winning ports 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, Although the case where the entry of the game ball to 5065a is regulated has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the specific winning holes 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a are directed to the ball discharging portions 683, 2683, 3683, 4683. May restrict the entry of game balls into the specific winning openings 5a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a. In this case, in a state where the specific winning openings 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a are directed to the ball-extracting portions 683, 2683, 3683, 4683, the second connection walls 654b, 2654b, 3654b or the connection walls 654 and the nails N5, N25 , N35, N45, and the distance between the third connecting walls 654c, 2654c, 3654c or the rotating body 4652 and the nails N6, N26, N36, N46 are set to dimensions larger than at least the outer diameter of the game ball. Thus, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion 681,2681,3681,4681 or the second opening portion 682,2682,3682,4682 and flowed into the flow-down area is downstream from the ball discharging portion 683,2683,3683,4683. Can flow down.

  In the first to third embodiments, the specific winning ports 65a, 2065a, and 3065a are directed to the first closing portions 671, 2671, and 3671 in the closed state, and in the fourth and fifth embodiments, Although the case where the winning openings 4065a and 5065a are directed to the second closing portion 4671 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the entry of the game balls into the specific winning openings 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, and 5065a is restricted. As long as it is, it may be directed in any direction.

  Further, in the closed state, the shift distances of the specific winning openings 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a are equal in the case of shifting from the closed state to the first open state and in the case of shifting to the second open state. It may be stationary. Thereby, in the case of shifting from the closed state to the first open state and in the case of shifting to the second open state, it is possible to easily set the time taken from the start to the end to the same.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the connecting wall 4654 is fixed to the disc portion 4651 and the rotating body 4651 is rotatably supported by the disc portion 4651 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The connecting wall 4654 may be rotatably held by the disc portion 4651.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the closed state, the game ball enters the specific game port 4065a by directing the specific game port 4065a that is open to the extent that the game ball can enter into the second closing part 4672. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the specific winning opening 4065a may be closed by bringing the tip of the rotating body 4652 and the tip of the connecting wall 4654 into contact with each other. The entrance of the game ball to the specific winning port 4065a may be restricted by setting the opening width of the winning port 4065a to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 uses the information on the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of start winning to be notified to the sound lamp controller 113 as the number of reserved balls. Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Information on various counters (first random number counter C1 and first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is an audio lamp. You may notify to the control apparatus 113. FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the game board 13 is provided with two of the first start port 64a and the second start port 640a where a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an incoming ball is detected independently of one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 640a, or independently of the first start port 64a and the second start port 640a. The game board 13 may be provided with three or more start openings for starting the big hit lottery.

  In addition, when providing a plurality of starting ports, when there is a holding at each starting port, the holding ball number command that the main control device 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which starting port is used for holding. Information to be shown may be included. In addition, in the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started, information indicating which variation effect is suspended by which start port may be included. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each starting port and a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set to and a fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting port by reducing the holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the changing pattern command by one.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is controlled by the main control. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the embodiment described above, the winning to the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on winnings to the first start port 64 and the second start port 640 is expressed by a number or a four-divided area in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The display may be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved ball is provided by the light emitting member. You may comprise so that a number may be notified.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in the above embodiment, the case where the rotational speed of the variable winning device 65 is constant when shifting from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state has been described. The rotational speed of the variable winning device 65 may be changed according to the jackpot type.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described embodiment, the case where the rotation direction of the variable winning device 65 is changed from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state has been described. Instead, regardless of the jackpot type, the rotation direction when shifting from the closed state to the open state may be the same. Similarly, the rotation direction when shifting from the closed state to the open state may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above embodiment, the case where the rotation angle of the rotation member 650 is constant in all rounds has been described. However, the rotation angle of the rotation member 650 is not necessarily limited to this. You may change it.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the value set in the speed counter 203m is two values “1” or “2” has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the speed counter 203m Three or more values may be set for. Thereby, since the rotation speed of the rotation member 650 can be changed more variously, the game nature which a player enjoys can be improved more.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, the case where the displacement speed of the specific winning opening 65a for each round is determined in advance for each jackpot type by the jackpot type selection table 202d is not limited to this. A lottery for determining the displacement speed may be performed every time a round is started. This makes it more difficult to predict which state will be shifted from the first open state to the second open state when shifting from the closed state to the open state, thereby further diversifying the game. .

  In addition, the numerical value quoted in each said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value. For example, in each of the above-described embodiments and the first and second modified examples, the case where the number of rounds per jackpot is 8 or 16 has been described. However, the number of rounds is not necessarily limited to this. The number of rounds may be 1 or a plurality other than 8 and 16.

  Note that a part or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be combined. Further, the control process may be configured to be applied to the configuration embodiment.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (Adjusting the ease of entering game balls by displacing the entrance)
A determination means for performing a determination of success / failure based on the establishment of the determination condition, a entrance opening that is set to an open state in which the entry is possible based on the determination that the determination means is a win, and the entrance opening is open A displacement means for displacing the entrance to a first position where the game ball can enter when entering a state or a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter than the first position; If it is determined, position determining means for determining whether the entrance is to be displaced to the first position or the second position; and the entrance to the position determined by the position determination means And a displacement control means for displacing the game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the opening state is established based on the determination by the determination means, the entrance can be displaced to either the first position or the second position by the displacement means. . Thereby, it is possible to direct the player to change the way of launching the game ball in accordance with the displacement of the entrance, so that the game enjoyed by the player can be improved. In addition, when the entrance is displaced to the second position, the game ball is less likely to enter the entrance than when the entrance is displaced to the first position. Which position of the second position is displaced is determined by the position determining means. Accordingly, since the ease of entering the entrance can be changed by the displacement of the entrance, there is an effect that the game enjoyed by the player can be improved.

  In gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 characterized in that said displacement means rotates said entrance.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the entrance is displaced to the first position or the second position by rotating the entrance by the displacing means, so that the entrance is displaced. For this reason, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement control means displaces the entrance to a restriction position where entry of the game ball into the entrance is restricted in a normal state that is not set to the entrance state. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A2, in the normal state, the entry of the game ball into the entrance is restricted, so that the entrance to the entrance through the displacement of the entrance by the displacing means. There is an effect that the sphere can be regulated or allowed.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a launching unit that launches a game ball, a first guide channel that guides the game ball launched by the launching unit to the first position, and a game ball launched by the launching unit Launching of a game ball launched from the launching means so as to cause the game ball to flow down to one of the second guide channel and the first guide channel or the second guide channel guided to the second position And an adjusting means for adjusting the force based on the player's operation.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, when the entrance is displaced to the first position, the game ball enters the entrance by passing the first guide channel. When the entrance is displaced to the second position, the game ball can easily enter the entrance by passing through the second guide channel. In addition, the player adjusts the firing force of the game ball so that the game ball passes through the first guide channel or the second guide channel by operating the adjusting means according to the displacement of the entrance. Thus, it is possible to efficiently enter the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the playability enjoyed by the player.

  In the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the second guide channel is set to have a larger channel width than the first guide channel.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, by setting the channel width of the second guide channel to be larger than the channel width of the first guide channel, Compared to the state where the entrance is displaced to the first position, the game ball can be efficiently entered into the entrance when the 2 position is displaced.

  In the gaming machine A5, when viewed from one side in the rotation direction of the entrance, either the restriction position, the first position or the second position, and the first position or the second position The other is arranged in this order, and the displacement control means is configured to displace the entrance from the restriction position to the other of the first position or the second position by the determination of the position determination means. A gaming machine A6, wherein the entrance is rotationally displaced from the restricted position to the other side in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, when viewed from one side in the rotation direction of the entrance, either the restricted position, the first position or the second position and the first position or the first position The other of the two positions is arranged in this order, and the displacement control means rotates the entrance to the other side in the rotation direction when the entrance is displaced to either the first position or the second position. Since it is displaced, it is possible to avoid the entrance of the entrance from passing through either the first position or the second position in the process of displacing the entrance from the restricted position to either the first position or the second position. . Thereby, in the process of displacing the entrance from the restricted position to either the first position or the second position, the game ball that has passed through either the first position or the second position enters the entrance There is an effect that can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine A5, when viewed from one side in the rotation direction of the entrance, either the restriction position, the first position or the second position, and the first position or the second position The other is arranged in this order, and the displacement control means is configured to displace the entrance from the restriction position to the other of the first position or the second position by the determination of the position determination means. A gaming machine A7, wherein the entrance is rotationally displaced from the restriction position to one side in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, when viewed from one side in the rotation direction of the entrance, either the restricted position, the first position or the second position and the first position or the first The other of the two positions is arranged in this order, and the displacement control means rotates the entrance to the other side in the rotation direction when the entrance is displaced to either the first position or the second position. Since it is displaced, the entrance can be configured to be displaced from the restricted position to either the first position or the second position via either the first position or the second position. In this case, in the process of displacing the entrance from the restricted position to either the first position or the second position, the first position when the entrance passes through either the first position or the second position. Alternatively, the game ball that has passed through either one of the second positions can enter the entrance. Therefore, the game ball is fired in such a way that the game ball is inserted into the entrance when the entrance passes either the first position or the second position. Can be directed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the playability enjoyed by the player.

  In the gaming machine A7, when the displacement control means displaces the entrance from the restricted position to either the first position or the second position as determined by the position determining means, A gaming machine A8, wherein the mouth is rotationally displaced from the restriction position to one side in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, when the entrance is displaced from the restricted position to either the first position or the second position, the entrance is on one side in the rotational direction. Since it is rotationally displaced, the direction in which the entrance is displaced can be set to be the same when the entrance is displaced from the restricted position to the first position and when the entrance is displaced to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether the entrance will be displaced to the first position or the second position when it is set to the open state, so that the game enjoyed by the player is improved. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature B group> (Grape prevention)
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a ball opening having an opening into which a game ball can be inserted, a first opening portion and a second opening portion for guiding the game ball to the ball opening, and the first condition. The opening at the first position or the second opening portion where the opening faces the first opening portion from the restriction position where it is difficult to enter the opening of the game ball guided to the opening portion or the second opening portion. Displacement means for displacing the entrance to the second position facing, displacement control means for controlling the displacement of the entrance by the displacement means, and when the entrance is displaced to the restriction position, A gaming machine B1 comprising a lowering portion for allowing a game ball that has passed through the first opening portion or the second opening portion to flow down to the outside of the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the opening from the restricted position where it is difficult to enter the opening of the gaming ball to the first opening or the second opening, the opening facing the first opening. The entrance is displaced to the second position facing. Thereby, it is possible to direct the player to change the way of launching the game ball in accordance with the displacement of the entrance, so that the game enjoyed by the player can be improved. Furthermore, when the entrance is displaced to the restricted position, the game ball that has passed through the first release portion or the second release portion can be caused to flow down to the outside of the entrance by the flow lower portion. There exists an effect that it can control that ball clogging occurs in the 2nd opening part.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the entrance is displaced to the first position, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion flows down from the lower part to the outside of the entrance, and the entrance When the ball is displaced to the second position, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion flows down from the lower part of the flow to the outside of the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, when the entrance is displaced to the first position, the game ball that has passed through the second opening portion flows down from the lower part to the outside of the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of the balls at the second opening portion. In addition, when the entrance is displaced to the second position, the game ball that has passed through the first opening portion flows down from the lower part of the entrance to the outside of the entrance, so that the clogging occurs at the first opening portion. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a closing portion that restricts the passage of game balls, and the opening faces the closing portion when the entrance is displaced to the restricting position. Game machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the entrance is displaced to the restricted position, the opening faces the closing part that regulates the passage of the gaming ball. There is an effect that the configuration for restricting the entry of the game ball into the ball opening can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine B3, when the entrance is displaced to the restriction position, a gap between the opening and the closing portion is set to a dimension smaller than an outer diameter.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B3, when the entrance is displaced to the restricted position, the distance between the opening and the closing portion is set to be smaller than the outer diameter. The game ball guided by the opening part and the second opening part can be prevented from passing between the opening and the closing part. Therefore, there is an effect that the game balls guided to the first opening part and the second opening part can be prevented from entering the entrance.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, when the restriction position, the first position, and the second position are arranged in this order, and the entrance is displaced to the second position, it is guided to the first opening portion. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the played game ball passes between the ball-entry portion and the closing portion and is guided to the lower part.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B3 or B4, when the entrance is displaced to the second position, the gaming ball guided to the first opening portion is moved between the entrance portion and the closing portion. Since it passes through the space and is guided to the lower part, there is an effect that the game ball can smoothly flow down to the outside of the entrance part.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B5, the gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the flow path has a flow path width larger than that of the first opening part and the second opening part.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, the flow passage has a larger channel width than the first opening part and the second opening part, so that the ball-entry part is displaced to the restricted position In addition, even if a large amount of game balls flow down from both the first opening portion and the second opening portion in a short time, there is an effect that the game balls can be smoothly guided from the lower portion to the lower portion of the entering portion. .

<Characteristic C group> (The number of winning balls varies depending on the position of the entrance.)
A ball entrance configured to be displaceable, a first collection passage capable of collecting a game ball that has entered the ball entrance when the entrance is displaced to the first position, and the first collection passage A first detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the second and a second ball capable of collecting the game ball that has entered the entrance when the entrance has been displaced to a second position different from the first position; A prize ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the recovery path, the second detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the second recovery path, and the first detection means and the second detection means. A payout means, and a payout setting means for setting the number of payout balls to be paid out by the payout means. The payout setting means includes a case where a game ball is detected by the first detection means and a case where the second detection is detected. It is characterized by setting a different number of payouts when detected by means. Game machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the number of prize balls paid out when the entrance is displaced to the first position differs from the number of prize balls delivered when the entrance is displaced to the second position. Set to a number. That is, since the game value obtained by the player differs depending on the position of the entrance when the game ball is inserted, the gameability enjoyed by the player can be improved. In addition, the game ball that has entered the entrance opening displaced to the first position is collected in the first collection passage, and the game ball that has entered the entrance opening displaced to the second position is collected in the second collection passage. . Since the payout means can detect the game ball that has passed through the first recovery passage by the first detection means, and the game ball that has passed through the second recovery passage can be detected by the second detection means, the control of the payout means can be simplified. effective.

  The gaming machine C1 includes an opening / closing member that opens or closes the first collection passage or the second collection passage, the opening / closing member is configured to be displaceable, and the entrance is displaced to the first position The first collection passage is opened to close the second collection passage while communicating with the ball entry portion, and the second collection passage is opened when the ball entrance is displaced to the second position. Then, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the first collection passage is closed while communicating with the ball-entry portion.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, when the entrance is displaced to the first position, the first collection path is opened and the second collection path is opened while communicating with the entry section. Since it is closed, it is possible to avoid erroneously entering the game ball in the second collection passage. In addition, when the entrance is displaced to the second position, the second collection passage is opened and the first collection passage is closed while communicating with the entry portion. There is an effect that it is possible to avoid entering the ball.

  In the gaming machine C2, the opening and closing member is formed integrally with the entrance, the gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, since the opening / closing member is formed integrally with the entrance, the opening / closing member can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the entrance. Thus, it is possible to avoid a deviation between the displacement of the entrance and the opening / closing member, so that the game balls that have entered the entrance can be smoothly sent to the 1 collection passage or the second collection passage. effective.

<Characteristic D group> (The entrance is rotated with respect to the fixed entrance. → (Lower) The entrance and the recovery passage are formed below the entrance rotation axis, and the motor is disposed above the rotation shaft. Space for)
An entrance having an opening into which a game ball can enter, an inlet into which the game ball entered into the entrance, and the entrance opening are rotated by rotating the entrance to the entrance. Rotating means for directing the direction at least in the first direction or the second direction, and the inflow port is formed when the opening of the entrance is directed in the first direction or the second direction by the rotating means. The gaming machine D1 is arranged at a position where an inflow region into which a game ball can flow is secured.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the direction in which the opening is directed is changed by rotating the ball entrance with respect to the inflow port, it is possible to direct the player to change the manner of launching the game ball. Therefore, diversification of games can be achieved, so that gameability enjoyed by the player can be improved. Furthermore, by changing the direction of the opening by rotating the entrance, it is possible to direct the player to change the manner of launching the game ball. Therefore, by providing a plurality of entrances separately, Compared with the case where the person is directed to change the manner of launching, the space of the entrance can occupy the whole, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the entrance is rotated to the first position or the second position, an inflow area of the inflow port through which game balls can flow is secured, so that the game balls entered into the entrance can be smoothly There is an effect that it can be made to flow into the inflow port.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the opening of the entrance is directed at least in the first direction or the second direction, the entire entrance is surrounded or covered by the entrance. A gaming machine D2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, at least when the opening of the entrance is directed in the first direction or the second direction, the entire inflow port is surrounded or covered by the entrance Therefore, when the opening of the entrance is directed in the first direction or the second direction, there is an effect that the game ball that has entered the entrance can smoothly flow into the inflow port.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inflow port is formed in an arc shape in which at least a part of an inner peripheral surface thereof protrudes downward.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, at least a part of the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port is formed in an arc shape that protrudes downward. There is an effect that it can be made to flow easily into the water.

  In the gaming machine D3, the entrance is provided with a rotation shaft connected to the driving means, and is configured to rotate about the rotation axis, and at least a part of the inner peripheral surface of the entrance is at the part. The inflow port is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis, and at least a part of an inner peripheral surface of the inflow port is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis, and at least the opening of the entrance is in the first position. In a state directed in one direction or the second direction, at least a part of the arc-shaped portion formed on the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port is an arc-shaped portion and a surface formed on the inner peripheral surface of the entrance. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being connected in a single line.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, at least in the state where the opening of the entrance is directed in the first direction or the second direction, an arc-shaped portion formed on the inner peripheral surface of the inlet Since at least a part of the arc is continuous with the arc-shaped portion formed on the inner peripheral surface of the entrance, the game balls that have entered the entrance can be made to flow smoothly. In addition, since the arc-shaped portion formed on the inner peripheral surface of the entrance and the arc-shaped portion formed on the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port are formed in an arc shape around the rotation axis, A portion where the arc-shaped portion formed on the inner peripheral surface of the entrance and the arc-shaped portion formed on the inner peripheral surface of the inflow port are continuously provided when the port rotates about the rotation axis There is an effect that it can be formed by making more.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a guide channel through which a game ball that has flowed into the inflow port is guided, and the inflow port remains at a fixed position when the entrance is rotated. D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D4, the inflow port remains at a fixed position even when the entrance is rotated and the direction of the opening is directed in the first direction or the second direction. Therefore, the structure of the guide channel can be simplified and the space occupied by the guide channel can be reduced as a whole, compared with the case where the inlet is displaced as the entrance is rotated.

  In the gaming machine D5, the inflow port and the guide channel are disposed below the rotation shaft.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the inflow port and the guide channel are disposed below the rotating shaft, so that a space for arranging other members above the rotating shaft is provided. There is an effect that it can be secured.
<Feature E group> (The opening size of the entrance is variable → (Lower) The opening size is variable by one (both) displacement, one drive source)
A game entrance having a first member and a second member that are displaceable in directions close to or away from each other, and into which a game ball having an opening region between the first member and the second member can enter, and a game ball A first guide channel and a second guide channel capable of guiding the first and second guide channels, and a displacement means for independently displacing the first member and the second member, and the first member is moved by the displacement means. When displaced in a direction away from the second member, the game ball guided in the first guide channel can enter the entrance, and the second member is separated from the first member. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that when it is displaced to, the gaming ball guided to the second guide channel can enter the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the first member is displaced in a direction away from the second member, the gaming ball guided by the first guide channel can enter the entrance, and the second member When displaced in a direction away from the first member, the game ball guided in the second guide channel can enter the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to perform a method of launching a game ball that causes the game ball to flow down into the first guide channel or the second guide channel according to the displacement of the first member or the second member. As described above, since diversification of games can be achieved, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the game enjoyment of the player.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the game ball guided to the first guide channel can enter the game port, the game ball guided to the second guide channel enters the game port E1. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the opening area is larger than a state in which a ball can enter the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, in a state where the gaming ball guided to the first guiding channel can enter the entrance, the gaming ball guided to the second guiding channel. Since the opening area is larger than the state in which the player can enter the entrance, the game ball guided to the first guide channel enters the entrance more efficiently than the game ball guided to the second guide channel. Can be balled. Therefore, since the game value given to the player can be changed according to the displacement mode of the entrance, there is an effect that the game can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the entrance is configured to enter the game ball guided to the second guide channel when the game ball guided to the first guide channel can enter the entrance. In a state where the entrance to the mouth is restricted and the game ball guided to the second guide channel can enter the entrance, the entrance of the game ball guided to the first guide channel to the entrance A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the ball is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the difference in gaming value by changing the manner of launching the gaming ball can be clarified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the playability enjoyed by the player.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first member and the second member are configured to be displaceable when a driving force is applied from the same driving source.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first member and the second member are configured to be displaceable by applying a driving force from the same driving source. Compared to the case where the first member and the second member are given driving force from separate driving sources, there is an effect that the cost of the parts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E4, the entrance is such that the game ball guided to the first guide channel can enter the entrance or the game ball guided to the second guide channel is the entrance. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the ease of entering a game ball in a state where it can enter the game is variably configured.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E4, the game ball guided to the first guide channel can enter the entrance or the game guided to the second guide channel. Since the ease of entering a game ball into the entrance is variable in a state where the ball can enter the entrance, there is an effect that diversification of the game can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine E5, the entrance is configured so that the game ball guided to the first guide channel can enter the entrance or the game ball guided to the second guide channel can enter the entrance. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that the duration of a state in which a ball can be entered is variably configured.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5, the gaming ball guided to the first guiding channel can enter the entrance or the gaming ball guided to the second guiding channel It is possible to change the easiness of entering the game ball into the entrance by changing the duration of the state in which the entrance is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that diversification of games can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the entrance is configured such that the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is variable.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, the displacement speed of the first member or the second member can be variably configured so that the gaming ball can easily enter the entrance. You can change that. Therefore, there is an effect that diversification of games can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the entrance is configured such that a displacement amount of the first member or the second member is variable.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, the displacement amount of the first member or the second member, that is, the opening region accompanying the displacement in the direction away from the second member or the first member. By changing the size, it is possible to change the ease of entering the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that diversification of games can be achieved.

<Characteristic F group> (Controlling the period during which the entrance is rotated)
Determination means for determining whether or not the game is successful based on establishment of the determination condition, a entrance for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the entry of the game ball, and entrance to the entrance A restricting means for restricting the position, a variable means for varying a positional relationship between the restricting means and the entrance, based on the determination by the determining means, and the restricting means and the entrance by the variable means. A period control unit for controlling a period for changing the positional relationship with the ball port; and a period determination unit for determining one period from a plurality of different periods controlled by the period control unit. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the longer the period during which the positional relationship between the means and the entrance is varied, the easier it is for the game ball to enter the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the entry to the entrance that gives a predetermined game value to the player based on the entry of the game ball is restricted by the restriction means. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the positional relationship between the limiting unit and the entrance is changed by the variable unit based on the determination that the determination unit that executes the determination is successful. The period during which the positional relationship between the restricting means and the entrance is varied by the variable means is controlled by the period control means, and one period is determined by the period determining means from a plurality of different periods controlled by the period control means. . Further, the longer the period in which the positional relationship between the restricting means and the entrance is changed by the variable means, the more easily the game ball enters the entrance. As a result, the ease of entering the game ball into the entrance changes according to the length of the period determined by the period determining means. Different game values can be played. Therefore, since a plurality of hit types having different gaming values can be provided with only one entrance, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, when the period determined by the period determining unit has elapsed, the positional relationship between the limiting unit and the entrance is initialized to the positional relationship before being varied by the variable unit. A gaming machine F2 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the period determined by the period determining means has elapsed, the positional relationship between the limiting means and the entrance is variable by the initialization means. Since the initial positional relationship is initialized, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being kept in a state where it is easy to enter even after the engine determined by the period determination unit has elapsed. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game value from being excessively given to the player and causing damage to the hall.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the variable means changes the positional relationship between the restricting means and the entrance opening by rotating the entrance opening with the direction intersecting the game board as an axis. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the positional relationship between the restricting means and the entrance is variable by rotating the entrance with the direction intersecting the game board as an axis. Since it varies depending on the means, there is an effect that the player can easily visually recognize the positional relationship between the restricting means and the entrance.

  In the gaming machine F3, the variable means rotates the entrance at a constant speed.

  According to the gaming machine F4, since the entrance is rotated at a constant speed by the variable means, it is possible to prevent the operation of the entrance from becoming unnatural and to give the player a sense of fairness. There is an effect.

<Characteristic G group> (Bulk clogging operation is executed at a predetermined opportunity)
A ball opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter and a position facing the opening of the ball opening are arranged to restrict the game ball from entering the opening. A restriction member, a moving means capable of moving the entrance to an opening position where an opening area where a game ball can enter is formed in the opening, and establishment of the first movement condition The moving means moves the entrance to the opening position, and based on the establishment of the second movement condition, the entrance to the entrance within the moving range where the opening area is not formed by the moving means. A gaming machine G1 having movement control means for controlling the mouth to move.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the restricting member is arranged at a position facing the opening of the entrance having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the opening. Regulated by The entrance is moved by the moving means to an opening position where an opening area where a game ball can enter is formed in the opening. Based on the establishment of the first movement condition, the entrance is moved to the opening position by the moving means, and on the basis of the establishment of the second movement condition, the entrance is made to enter the entrance within the moving range where no opening area is formed It is controlled by the movement control means so that the mouth is moved. Thereby, when the second movement condition is satisfied, the entrance is moved in a movement range in which the opening region is not formed, so that a defect such as a ball clogging has occurred between the opening and the regulating member. It can be solved. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem can be solved at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that performs determination, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and a movement of the identification information displayed on the display unit A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a static display mode, wherein the second movement condition is established based on the end of the dynamic display mode of the identification information. Machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is executed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. Identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. The second movement condition is established based on the end of the dynamic display mode of the identification information. Thereby, since the second movement condition is established at the timing when the dynamic display mode of the identification information is completed, the entrance can be periodically moved within a range where the opening area is not formed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to regularly solve problems such as ball clogging.

  In the gaming machine G2, the first movement condition is established after the identification information indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is displayed. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the first movement condition is the first movement condition after the identification information indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's pleasure to predict whether the second movement condition is satisfied or whether the first movement condition is satisfied is increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a ball entering discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not a game ball has entered in a state in which the entrance is not moved to the opening position by the moving unit, and its ball entering discrimination A gaming machine G4, characterized by having abnormality processing means for executing predetermined abnormality processing based on the fact that the game ball has been entered by the means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the entrance determining means determines whether or not a game ball has entered while the entrance is not moved to the opening position by the moving means. A predetermined abnormality process is executed by the abnormality processing means based on the determination that the game ball has entered by the entry determination means. Thereby, although the entrance is not moved to the opening position, a problem that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, F1 to F4, G1 to G4, the gaming machine is a slot machine . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, F1 to F4, G1 to G4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, F1 to F4, G1 to G4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13, 2013, 3013, 4013 Game board 65a, 2065a, 3065a, 4065a, 5065a Specific winning opening (opening of the entrance)
651, 2651, 4651 Disc (opening / closing member)
3651a Rotating shaft 5651c First fan-shaped member (part of the opening / closing member)
5651d Second sector member (part of the opening / closing member)
651b, 2651b, 3651b, 4651b, 5651b Inlet 652, 2652, 3652 Entrance part (entrance entrance)
5652 First rotating body (first member)
654, 2654, 3653, 4654 Connecting wall (part of the entrance)
654b, 2654b, 3654b Second connecting wall (part of the ball entry)
654c, 2654c, 3654c Third connecting wall (part of the entrance ball)
5654 Second rotating body (second member)
671, 2671, 3671, 3671 First closing part (closing part)
672, 2672, 3672, 3673 Second closing part (closing part)
673, 2673, 3673, 4673 Third closing part (closing part)
681,2681,3681,4681 1st opening part (opening part, 1st guide flow path)
682, 2682, 3682, 4682 Second open part (open part, second guide flow path)
683, 2683, 3683, 4683 Ball throwing part (lower part)
691 First passage (first recovery passage, guide passage)
692 Second passage (second recovery passage, guide passage)
M drive motor (displacement means, rotation means)

Claims (3)

Determination means for executing a determination of success / failure based on establishment of the determination condition;
A entrance opening that is set to an open state that allows entry based on the determination that the determination means is a hit,
Displacement means for displacing the entrance to a first position where the game ball can enter when the entrance is opened or a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter than the first position;
Position determining means for determining whether the entrance is to be displaced to the first position or the second position when the determining means determines that it is a hit, and the position determining means Displacement control means for displacing the ball entrance at a position.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement means rotates the entrance.   The said displacement control means displaces the said entrance into the restriction | limiting position where the entrance of the game ball to the said entrance is restricted in the normal state which is not set to the said entrance state. Item 3. The gaming machine according to Item 2.

Images